ppg - pc manual

PROTECTIVE COATINGS

www.sigmacoatings.com/protective

MANUALDATA SHEETS | SYSTEM SHEETS | INFORMATION SHEETS

Data sheet index7460 - NOVAGUARD 8107945 - NOVAGUARD 8307468 - NOVAGUARD 8407755 - NOVAGUARD 8907447 - PHENGUARD 2537409 - PHENGUARD 9307435 - PHENGUARD 9357436 - PHENGUARD 9407959 - PHENGUARD 9657589 - PITT-CHAR XP7546 - PSX 7007149 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 207145 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 227203 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 357251 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 407250 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 457152 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 807870 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 2007871 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 4007124 - SIGMA AQUAWELD 1007406 - SIGMACOVER 2117991 - SIGMACOVER 2407412 - SIGMACOVER 2567417 - SIGMACOVER 2807424 - SIGMACOVER 280 LT7472 - SIGMACOVER 3007483 - SIGMACOVER 300 LT7453 - SIGMACOVER 3856823 - SIGMACOVER 4107465 - SIGMACOVER 4357466 - SIGMACOVER 4567712 - SIGMACOVER 456 HS7441 - SIGMACOVER 4807420 - SIGMACOVER 5227430 - SIGMACOVER 6307434 - SIGMACOVER 630 LT7988 - SIGMACOVER 6407992 - SIGMACOVER 640 ALUMINIUM7993 - SIGMACOVER 640 ALUMINIUM LT7989 - SIGMACOVER 640 LT7995 - SIGMACOVER 640 SEALER 7726 - SIGMACOVER 8057450 - SIGMACOVER 10007715 - SIGMACOVER 15007531 - SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT7524 - SIGMADUR 5207740 - SIGMADUR 5407537 - SIGMADUR 5507530 - SIGMADUR 5807518 - SIGMADUR 5907529 - SIGMADUR 18007155 - SIGMAFAST 207234 - SIGMAFAST 407236 - SIGMAFAST 457802 - SIGMAFAST 2057541 - SIGMAFAST 2107705 - SIGMAFAST 2137704 - SIGMAFAST 3027803 - SIGMAFAST 3700672UK - SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL7944 - SIGMAGUARD 2607985 - SIGMAGUARD 6037433 - SIGMAGUARD 7207459 - SIGMAGUARD 7307551 - SIGMAGUARD 7507475 - SIGMAGUARD CSF 5757785 - SIGMAGUARD CSF 5857443 - SIGMAGUARD CSF 6507753 - SIGMAGUARD CSF 6607618 - SIGMALINE 445

7618 - SIGMALINE 4457655 - SIGMALINE 8557659 - SIGMALINE 8597497 - SIGMALINE 20007667 - SIGMALINE 25007416 - SIGMAPRIME 2007930 - SIGMAPRIME 7007938 - SIGMAPRIME 8007135 - SIGMARINE 247244 - SIGMARINE 357213 - SIGMARINE 407256 - SIGMARINE 417238 - SIGMARINE 487240 - SIGMARINE 497922 - SIGMASHIELD 2207926 - SIGMASHIELD 220 LT7951 - SIGMASHIELD 4207955 - SIGMASHIELD 420 LT7952 - SIGMASHIELD 4607972 - SIGMASHIELD 460 LT7745 - SIGMASHIELD 8257749 - SIGMASHIELD 825 LT7743 - SIGMASHIELD 8807954 - SIGMASHIELD 9057490 - SIGMASHIELD 10907744 - SIGMASHIELD 12007746 - SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT7260 - SIGMATHERM 1757445 - SIGMATHERM 2307565 - SIGMATHERM 3507563 - SIGMATHERM 4507261 - SIGMATHERM 5007555 - SIGMATHERM 5207592 - SIGMATHERM 5387564 - SIGMATHERM 5407179 - SIGMAWELD 107112 - SIGMAWELD 157173 - SIGMAWELD 1207171 - SIGMAWELD 1657167 - SIGMAWELD 1907177 - SIGMAWELD 1997370 - SIGMAZINC 197402 - SIGMAZINC 1027702 - SIGMAZINC 102 HS7401 - SIGMAZINC 1097701 - SIGMAZINC 109 HS7558 - SIGMAZINC 1587560 - SIGMAZINC 1607570 - SIGMAZINC 1707403 - SIGMAZINC 68 HS 7761 - STEELGUARD 5517762 - STEELGUARD 5527763 - STEELGUARD 5537764 - STEELGUARD 5547765 - STEELGUARD 5617766 - STEELGUARD 5627767 - STEELGUARD 5637768 - STEELGUARD 5647769 - STEELGUARD 5817731 - STEELGUARD FM 5497732 - STEELGUARD FM 5507733 - STEELGUARD FM 5607735 - STEELGUARD FM 585

System sheet index2411 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ GLOSSY PU SYSTEM FOR C5I2412 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ GLOSSY PU SYSTEM FOR C5M2413 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ SEMI GLOSS PU SYSTEM FOR C5M2414 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ POLYSILOXANE SYSTEM FOR C5M2415 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ SEMI GLOSS PU SYSTEM FOR C42416 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ GLOSSY PU SYSTEM FOR C42417 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ HS PU SYSTEM FOR C32418 - EPOXY/ SEMI GLOSS PU SYSTEM FOR C32419 - EPOXY/ GLOSSY PU SYSTEM FOR C32420 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ EPOXY SYSTEM FOR C42421 - EPOXY SYSTEM FOR C42422 - EPOXY SYSTEM FOR C3 INTERIOR2423 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ EPOXY SYSTEM FOR C3 INTERIOR2424 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ HS PU SYSTEM FOR C5M2425 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ SEMI GLOSS PU SYSTEM FOR C5I4010 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE - ALKYD PAINT SYSTEM4011 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE - RECOATABLE EPOXY/POLYURETHANESYSTEM4012 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE - ACRYLIC DISPERSION SYSTEM4016 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE - WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM4020 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE - ALKYD PAINT SYSTEM4021 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE - RECOATABLE EPOXY/POLYURETHANESYSTEM4022 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE - ACRYLIC DISPERSION SYSTEM4024 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE - HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY/POLYURETHANESYSTEM4026 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE - WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM4030 - STEEL PROTECTION - RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - ALKYD PAINT SYSTEM4031 - STEEL PROTECTION - RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - RECOATABLEEPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM4032 - STEEL PROTECTION - RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - ACRYLIC DISPERSION SYSTEM4034 - STEEL PROTECTION - RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - HIGH SOLIDSEPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM4036 - STEEL PROTECTION - RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM4040 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - ALKYDPAINT SYSTEM4041 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE -RECOATABLE EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM4042 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - HIGHSOLIDS EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM4045 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - SOLVENTFREE EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM4046 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE -WATERBORNE EPOXY/HIGH SOLIDS POLYURETHANE SYSTEM4047 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - SOLVENTFREE EPOXY/POLYMERIC URETHANE SYSTEM4050 - STEEL PROTECTION - ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE WITH ABRASION/IMPACT - SOLVENTFREE FLINT REINFORCED EPOXY SYSTEM4051 - STEEL PROTECTION - ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE WITH ABRASION/IMPACT - HIGH SOLIDSGLASSFLAKE REINFORCED EPOXY SYSTEM4060 - STEEL PROTECTION - HIGH TEMPERATURE RESISTANT ALKYD PAINT SYSTEM -TEMPERATURE UP TO 175°C/350°F4061 - STEEL PROTECTION - HIGH TEMPERATURE RESISTANT SILICATE/ACRYLIC PAINT SYSTEM -TEMPERATURE UP TO 350°C/660°F4062 - STEEL PROTECTION - HIGH TEMPERATURE RESISTANT EPOXY SYSTEM - TEMPERATUREUP TO 200°C/390°F4064 - STEEL PROTECTION - HIGH TEMPERATURE RESISTANT SILICATE SYSTEM - TEMPERATUREUP TO 400°C/750°F4070 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WATER - EPOXY TAR SYSTEM4071 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WATER OR SUBSOIL CONDITIONS - SOLVENT FREEEPOXY SYSTEM4072 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WATER - HIGH SOLIDS TAR FREE EPOXY SYSTEM4076 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN HOT WATER - PHENOLIC EPOXY SYSTEM - MIOEPOXY SYSTEM4081 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN CHEMICALS - PHENOLIC EPOXY SYSTEM4082 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN CHEMICALS - SOLVENT FREE EPOXY SYSTEM4083 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN CHEMICALS - ZINC ETHYL SILICATE SYSTEM4090 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN REFINED PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AND CRUDE OIL -HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY SYSTEM

4091 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN REFINED PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AND CRUDE OIL -EPOXY TAR SYSTEM4092 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN REFINED PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AND CRUDE OIL -SOLVENT FREE EPOXY SYSTEM4101 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WASTE WATER AND SLURRY - EPOXY TAR SYSTEM4102 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WASTE WATER AND SLURRY - HIGH SOLIDS TARFREE EPOXY SYSTEM4103 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WASTE WATER AND SLURRY - SOLVENT FREEPHENLIC EPOXY SYSTEM4113 - STEEL PROTECTION - SYSTEM FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS - ZINC EPOXY PRIMED STEEL

Information sheet index1410 - CONVERSION TABLES1411 - EXPLANATION TO PRODUCT DATA SHEETS1430 - SAFETY INDICATIONS1431 - SAFETY IN CONFINED SPACES AND HEALT SAFETY EXPLOSION HAZARD - TOXIC HAZARD1433 - SAFE WORKING IN CONFINED SPACES1434 - DIRECTIVES FOR VENTILATION PRACTICE1490 - CLEANING OF STEEL AND REMOVAL OF RUST1491 - SPECIFICATION FOR MINERAL ABRASIVES1492 - SURFACE PREPARATION OF STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS - SHOP APPLICATION1493 - INTERNAL CHEMICAL CLEANING OF STEEL PIPES - IN-SITU APPLICATION1496 - SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE (FLOORS)1650 - RELATIVE HUMIDITY - SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE - AIR TEMPERATURE

/4

November 20104 pages

NOVAGUARD 810

two component solvent free amine rapid cured phenolic epoxy coating

– one coat tank coating system excellent resistance to crude oil up to 176°F (80°C) – suitable for storage of unleaded gasolines – good chemical resistance against chemicals and solvents – good visibility due to light colour – dry heat resistance 248°F (120°C) – easy to clean – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard –

light grey - semigloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) approx. 11.0 lbs/gal (1.3 g/cm³) 98 ± 2% max. 97 g/l (0.81 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 600 μm depending on system 134.3 ft²/gal for 12 mils ( 3.3 m²/l for 300 μm) 4 hours min. 6 hours * max. 28 days * 2 days *

(data for components)

at least 12 months * see additional data

– steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2½ or SSPC-SP10 , blasting profi le 2 - 4 mils (50 - 100 μm) substrate temperature should be above 41°F ( 5°C) and at least 5°F (3°C) –above dew point during application and curing

mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 ( 4:1 )

the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at –least 104°F (40°C) at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application – no thinner should be added – for recommended application instructions: see working procedure –

none

DESCRIPTION

PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS

COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval

Full cure after

Shelf life (cool and dry place)

RECOMMENDEDSUBSTRATE CONDITIONSAND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Induction time

/4

November 2010

NOVAGUARD 810

– use heated airless spray plural component equipment in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down –of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible –

no thinner should be added approx 0.019- 0.023 in 4000 Psi ( approx 280 Bar )

Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use – paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time –has been expired

for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets

although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes

no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask –should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in confi ned spaces to maintain good visibility –

Film thickness and spreading rate

theoretical spreading rate ft²/gal 134.3 69.2

dft in mils 12 24

measuring wet fi lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the –real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which –retards the release of air trapped in the paint fi lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specifi ed dft plus 2.4 –mil (60 μm)

measuring dry fi lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some –days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint fi lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed –in between the coating and the measuring device

AIRLESS SPRAY

Recommended thinner Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

November 2010

NOVAGUARD 810

Overcoating with Novaguard 810 (spot repair and stripe coating)

substrate temperature

50°F (10°C) 68°F (20°C) 86°F (30°C) 122°F (50°C)

minimum interval

12 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours

maximum interval

28 days 28 days 28 days 14 days

surface should be dry and free from any contamination –

Curing table

substrate temperature dry to handle full cure50°F (10°C) 20 hours 3 days68°F (20°C) 9 hours 2 days86°F (30°C) 7 hours 1 day122°F (50°C) 4 hours 12 hours

adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working –procedure should be followed

Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modifi cation of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances.Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.

Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specifi cation for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491

Worldwide availability

REFERENCES

/4

November 2010

NOVAGUARD 810

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the Sigma Coatings products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specifi c enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use.

PPG Protective & Marine Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise).

The data contained herein are liable to modifi cation as a result of practical experience and continuous product development.This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the user's responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product.

The English text of this document shall prevail over any translation thereof.

PDS 7460

/3

April 20093 pages Revision of November 2005

two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy compound

– sprayable caulking to overlap the welding seams suitable caulking compound for use under SigmaGuard CSF 650 and –Novaguard 840 excellent chemical resistance against crude oil, unleaded gasolines and a –wide range of petrochemicals and solvents can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) – good visibility due to light colour – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard –

cream - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product)

1.4 g/cm³ 100% max. 105 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 144 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) 3500 - 5000 µm depending on system 6 hours min. 16 hours * max. 3 months * 5 days *


at least 12 months

– steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 µm steel with suitable holding primer (SigmaGuard 260 or SigmaCover 280) –which must be dry, clean and free from any contamination

mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25

when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least –20°C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application – no thinner should be added –

none

1 hour at 20°C * * see additional data

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness Touch dry after Overcoating interval

Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

NOVAGUARD 830

/3

April 2009

NOVAGUARD 830

– heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minimum of 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down –of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible –

no thinner should be added approx. 0.67 mm (= 0.026 in) at an angle of 30° à 40° at 20°C (paint temperature) min. 30 MPa (= approx. 350 bar; 5000 p.s.i.)at 30°C (paint temperature) min. 25 MPa (= approx. 250 bar; 3500 p.s.i.)

Thinner 90-83 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use – paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time –has been expired



theoretical spreading rate m²/l 0.3

dft in µm 3000

structure: in different layers wet in wet in order to reach the required fi lm thickness

Overcoating table with solvent free tanklinings

substrate temperature 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval 30 hours 16 hours 12 hours

maximum interval 3 months 2 months 1 month


Curing table

substrate temperature dry to handle full cure10°C 30 hours 7 days20°C 16 hours 5 days30°C 10 hours 3 days

although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained –during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434)

AIRLESS SPRAY


CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

April 2009

NOVAGUARD 830

Pot life

20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.

due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may –increase


Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490






PDS 7945


REFERENCES

/5

March 20115 pages Revision of April 2009

NOVAGUARD 840

two component solvent free amine cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating

– one coat tank coating system clear version for glassmat reinforced solvent free tank bottom system (see –system sheet 4145) excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90°C – suitable for storage of unleaded gasolines – good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents – good visibility due to light colour – glossy and smooth appearance – easy to clean – can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard – approved to Air BP F2D2 section 2.1 for the storage of jet fuels –

green, cream, clear - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 100% max. 106 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 142 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) 73 g/ltr (0.9 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) see information sheet 1411 300 - 600 μm depending on system 3.3 m²/l for 300 μm * 6 hours min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 5 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm substrate temperature must be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew point –during application and curing steel with suitable primer (SigmaGuard 260) which must be dry, clean and –free from any contamination

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/5

March 2011

NOVAGUARD 840


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at –least 20°C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application – no thinner should be added – for recommended application instructions: see working procedure –

none


– use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down –of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible –

no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20°C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.)at 30°C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.)

for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added

Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use – paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time –has been expired





Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY


BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/5

March 2011

NOVAGUARD 840


theoretical spreading rate m²/l 3.3 1.7

dft in μm 300 600

max. dft when brushing: 150 μm

measuring wet fi lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the –real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which –retards the release of air trapped in the paint fi lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specifi ed dft plus 60 –μm


Overcoating with Novaguard 840 (spot repair and stripe coating)


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

3 months 3 months 2 months 1 month


ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

March 2011

NOVAGUARD 840

Curing table

substrate temperature dry to handle full cure5°C 60 hours 15 days10°C 30 hours 7 days20°C 16 hours 5 days30°C 10 hours 3 days


WASHING PROCEDURE all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly –cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or high- –pressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as abovenote: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained – concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. –1 ltr/10 m² tanks should be fi lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the –water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly fl ushed out with tap water – depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water –samples, after fi lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be fi t to carry drinking water –

Pot life (at application viscosity)

20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.




/5

March 2011

NOVAGUARD 840







PDS 7468 237775 cream 3012002200 180207 green 4000001400

REFERENCES

/4


NOVAGUARD 890

two component solvent free amine cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating

– one coat tank coating system excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90°C – suitable for storage of unleaded gasolines blended up to 100% ethanol – (E5 up to E100) suitable for storage of biodiesel (EN14214) – good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents – good visibility due to light colour – semigloss and smooth appearance – clear version for glassmat reinforced solvent free tank bottom system (see –system sheet 4155) easy to clean – can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard –

green, cream, clear - semigloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 100% max. 94 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 131 g/l (approx. 1.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 600 μm depending on system 3.3 m²/l for 300 μm * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 6 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing steel with suitable primer (SigmaGuard 260) which must be dry, clean and –free from any contamination

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/4

March 2011

NOVAGUARD 890



none


use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20°C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.)at 30°C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.)


Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use – paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time –has been expired





Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/4

March 2011

NOVAGUARD 890



dft in μm 300 600



measuring dry fi lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days –(depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint fi lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed –in between the coating and the measuring device

Overcoating table with itself (spot repair and stripe coating)


10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval

36 hours 24 hours 16 hours

maximum interval

3 months 2 months 1 month


Curing table



ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

March 2011

NOVAGUARD 890


20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.









PDS 7755 269264 green 4194542200 282887 cream 3002002200


REFERENCES

/4

September 20114 pages

PHENGUARD 253

two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy primer

– excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils and solvents maximum cargo fl exibility – low cargo absorption – Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 – good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface –

grey, offwhite - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 72 ± 3% max. 200 g/l (approx. 1.8 lb/gal) 100 - 150 μm 7.2 m²/l for 100 μm * min. 10 hours * max. 5 days * see curing table *



– steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2½ and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm – the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of –Phenguard 253 substrate temperature must be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above –15°C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure – thinner should be added after mixing the components –

allow induction time before use15°C - 45 min.20°C - 30 min.25°C - 15 min.

4 hours at 20°C * * see additional data

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval

Curing time




Induction time

Pot life

/4

September 2011

PHENGUARD 253

Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)

Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.)

only for spot repair and stripe coating Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53


this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes



dft in μm 100 150

Overcoating table for Phenguard 253


10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

24 hours 16 hours 10 hours 4 hours 3 hours

maximum interval

7 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days


AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure

AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure

BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2011

PHENGUARD 253

Curing table

substrate temperature min. curing time of Phenguard 253 tankcoating system before transport of cargoes. Please contact your PPG PMC representative for further details.

10°C 14 days15°C 10 days20°C 7 days30°C 4 days40°C 4 days


10°C 6 hours20°C 4 hours30°C 2 hours




REFERENCES

/4

September 2011

PHENGUARD 253






PDS 7447

/4


PHENGUARD 930

two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy primer

– primer coat in the Phenguard tankcoating system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils, –fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo fl exibility – low cargo absorption – good resistance to hot water – Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 – good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface –

offwhite - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm³ 66 ± 2% max. 191 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 315 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 μm * 6.6 m²/l for 100 μm * 2 hours min. 36 hours * max. 21 days * see curing table *



– steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2½ and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm – the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of –Phenguard 930 substrate temperature must be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing

marine system sheet: 3141 tankcoatings system sheet: 3322

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Curing time



SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 930








Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 100 125



Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 930

Overcoating table for Phenguard 935 and SigmaGuard 790


10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



Curing table

substrate temperature min. curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11 and ballast water and tanktest with sea water


minimum curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of –cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to –the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cargo cure is –required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with non-aggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) the performance of the applied system strongly depends on the curing –degree of the fi rst coat at time of recoating. Therefore overcoating time between 1st and 2nd coat is extended in comparison between 2nd and 3rd coat (see overcoating details) when used as a primer under solvent free tank-linings the dft must be limited –to a maximum of 100 μm


10°C 6 hours20°C 4 hours30°C 1.5 hour

/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 930








PDS 7409 180706 offwhite 7001002200


REFERENCES

/4


PHENGUARD 935

two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating

– second coat in the Phenguard tankcoating system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils, –fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo fl exibility – low cargo absorption – good resistance to hot water – Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 – good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface –

pink - eggshell




– previous coat of Phenguard 930; dry and free from any contamination the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of –Phenguard 935 substrate temperature must be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Curing time




/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 935







Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 100 125



Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 935



10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



Curing table



minimum curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of –cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to –the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cargo cure is –required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with non-aggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) the performance of the applied system strongly depends on the curing –degree of the fi rst coat at time of recoating. Therefore overcoating time between 1st and 2nd coat is extended in comparison between 2nd and 3rd coat (see overcoating details)



/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 935


Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Specifi cation for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491






PDS 7435 179115 pink 6007002200


REFERENCES

/4


PHENGUARD 940

two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy fi nish

– fi nish coat in the Phenguard tankcoating system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils, –fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo fl exibility – low cargo absorption – good resistance to hot water – Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 – good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface – easy to clean –

light grey (green on request) - eggshell




– previous coat of Phenguard 935; dry and free from any contamination the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of –Phenguard 940 substrate temperature must be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Curing time




/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 940







Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 100 125



Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 940



10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



Curing table



minimum curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of –cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to –the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cargo cure is –required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with non-aggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) the performance of the applied system strongly depends on the curing –degree of the fi rst coat at time of recoating. Therefore overcoating time between 1st and 2nd coat is extended in comparison between 2nd and 3rd coat (see overcoating details)



/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 940


Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Specifi cation for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491






PDS 7436 179116 green 4000002200 179118 grey 5000002200


REFERENCES

/4


PHENGUARD 965

two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating

– Phenguard 965 system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, fats –(regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo fl exibility – low cargo absorption – easy to clean – good resistance to hot water – can be applied and cures at temperatures down to +5°C – good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface –

offwhite, pink, grey - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm³ 68 ± 2% max. 195 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 329 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 100 μm * 6.8 m²/l for 100 μm * 2 - 3 hours at 20°C, 14 - 16 hours at 5°C min. 8 hours * max. 14 days * see curing table *



– steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2½ and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm – the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of –Phenguard 965 substrate temperature must be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew point –during application and curing

Phenguard 965 offwhite 100 μm Phenguard 965 pink 100 μm Phenguard 965 grey 100 μm

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 965


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above –15°C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance – thinner should be added after mixing the components –





Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 100 125



Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 965

Overcoating table for Phenguard 965 for dft up to 100 μm


5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



Curing table for dft up to 100 μm

substrate temperature min. curing time of Phenguard 965 system before transport of cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11 and ballast water and tanktest with sea water


minimum curing time of Phenguard 965 system before transport of cargoes –with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to –the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cargo cure is –required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with non-aggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) when used as a primer under solvent free tank-linings the dft must be limited –to a maximum of 100 μm


5°C 8 hours10°C 6 hours15°C 4 hours20°C 2 hours30°C 1 hour

/4

March 2011

PHENGUARD 965








PDS 7959 199289 offwhite 7001002200 199282 pink 6007002200 199284 grey 5000002200


REFERENCES

/3

July 20103 pages Revision of January 2009

PITT-CHAR XP

solvent free thick fi lm intumescent epoxy coating for hydrocarbon pool andjet fi res

– highly durable intumescent coating for protection of steel against hydrocarbon pool and jet fi res; typical applications include: Offshore - structural steel members, bulkheads and decks Onshore - pipework, storage tanks and vessels unique fl exibility offers enhanced performance on vibrating structures and in –conditions of explosion overpressure suitable for use in cryogenic conditions – good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals – excellent abrasion resistance – suitable for corrosivity categories up to C5-I and C5-M – meets the requirements for Norsok M501 rev 5 accelerated aging and –hydrocarbon fi re testing approved by DNV, Lloyds, BV, UL and GASAFE –

grey - matt

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.10 g/cm³note:the applied density is dependent upon many variables such astemperature, test method and application method 100% max. 0 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 0 g/l (0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 normally 1000 - 7000 μm applied in one coatnote:the required dry fi lm thickness must be in accordance with theapproval certifi cation 1.10 kg/m² for 1000 μm * 10 hours * min. 4 hours max. 1 month


base: at least 18 monthshardener: at least 24 months * see additional data

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density

Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness

Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval


/3

July 2010

PITT-CHAR XP

– approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination where mesh reinforcement of Pitt-Char XP is necessary, this should be –carried out in accordance with the Pitt-Char XP Application Guidelines substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing curing will be retarded at temperatures below 10°C and will cease below 5°C – relative humidity during application must be lower than 85% –

mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 2.33 : 1mixing ratio by weight: base to hardener 3.25 : 1for details see the Pitt-Char XP Application Guidelines

none

45 minutes at 25°C *

twin feed application twin feed spray equipment utilising a minimum 10 inch King air motor is –recommended base and hardener need to be pre-heated to a minimum of 60°C while –circulating through the unit suitable insulated and heated hoses should be used –

no thinner should be added 40° (for large fl at surfaces) approx. 0.89 - 1.09 mm (= 0.035 - 0.043 in) 24 MPa (= approx. 240 bar; 3500 p.s.i.)

single feed application 5% - 7% of Thinner 60-30 may be necessary, but the quantity shall never exceed 10%.The addition of thinner will affect sag resistance and overcoating intervals. 60° (for large fl at surfaces) approx. 0.84 - 0.89 mm (= 0.033 - 0.035 in) 35 MPa (= approx. 350 bar; 5000 p.s.i.)use of spray equipment with a ratio of 74 : 1 is recommendedmaterial temperature (mixed): 23 - 35°Cthe maximum length of the hoses should not exceed 30 m

(recommended for small areas and touch up only) no thinner should be added

Thinner 90-53





Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY

Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure

Recommended thinner

Nozzle angle Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure

TROWEL Recommended thinner

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/3

July 2010

PITT-CHAR XP

Curing table (for solvent free aplication)

substrate temperature dry to handle (Shore D = 25)10°C 52 hours15°C 40 hours25°C 13 hours40°C 7 hours

curing times may vary depending on substrate, ambient and material –temperature adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)

Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431


The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the coatings products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specifi c enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use.




PDS 7589 281999 grey 3000002504

ADDITIONAL DATA

REFERENCES

/3

May 20113 pages Revision of February 2010

PSX 700

two component engineered siloxane coating

– unique, high gloss, engineered siloxane can be applied directly over inorganic zinc – excellent colour and gloss retention – high solids, VOC compliant – applied by brush, roller or spray, without thinning – good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals –

full colour range - gloss

(data for mixed product) 1.36 g/cm³ 90 ± 2% max. 119 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 164 g/l (approx. 1.4 lb/gal) 84 g/ltr (0.7 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) 75 - 175 μm per coat 7.2 m²/l for 125 μm * 2 hours min. 3 hours *

(data for components) * see additional data

– previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently –roughened prepare damaged areas to original surface preparation specifi cations, –feathering edges of intact coating for touch-up and repair; apply additional material after removing dirt, –contaminants and old loose coatings or antifoulings substrate temperature should be above 0°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing


use power mixer powered by an air- or an explosion proof electric motor –

none


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval



Induction time

Pot life

/3

May 2011

PSX 700

Thinner 60-12/ Thinner 21-06 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.15 - 0.21 mm (= 0.006 - 0.008 in)

– the recommended dft cannot be reached in one coat natural bristle – maintain a wet edge – level any air bubbles with bristle brush –

Thinner 90-58




dft in μm 75 125 175

theoretical spreading rate m²/l 12.0 7.2 5.1

when applying more than 1 coat it is recommended that the total dry fi lm thickness does not exceed 250 μm

Overcoating table for PSX 700 for dft up to 175 μm


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval



substrate temperature touch dry dry to handle5°C 7 hours 16 hours10°C 4.5 hours 8.5 hours20°C 2 hours 4.5 hours30°C 1 hour 3 hours

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orifi ce

BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

May 2011

PSX 700


10°C 6.5 hours20°C 4 hours30°C 1.5 hour


Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Surface preparation of concrete (fl oors) see information sheet 1496






PDS 7546


REFERENCES

3 pages Revision of April 2007

September 2009

page 1/3

one component water borne high build zinc phosphate primer/coating based on acrylic dispersion

– particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons excellent adhesion to well pretreated steel – good anticorrosive properties – fast drying – can be overcoated with most water borne acrylics, water borne epoxy –coatings and alkyd paints as well as certain solvent borne two component products

RAL colours (other colours available on request) - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal)

1.3 g/cm³ 43 ± 2% max. 19 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 25 g/l (approx. 0.2 lb/gal) 75 µm per coat 5.7 m²/l for 75 µm 30 minutes min. 4 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months

– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm steel; pretreated according to ISO-St3 – shop primed steel; sweep blasted or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Ss or –SPSS-Pt2 substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% –

– stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15°C, otherwise –extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance – must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport –

tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1700 - 2130 p.s.i.)

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






SIGMA AQUACOVER 20

SIGMA AQUACOVER 20

September 2009

page 2/3

tap water 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5% * for localised areas of diffi cult access only

tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator fi lter and tip fi lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)

Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne paints

1st cleaning with Thinner 90-53

2nd cleaning with Thinner 70-05

3rd cleaning with warm tap water (30 - 35°C) after which water borne paints can be sprayed

Table 2: from water borne- to solvent borne paints

1st cleaning with warm tap water (30 - 35°C)


3rd cleaning with Thinner 90-53

Thinner 70-05 can be re-used


although this is a water borne paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes


BRUSH/ROLLER * Recommended thinner Volume of thinner

CLEANING SOLVENT

CLEANING PROCEDURE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SIGMA AQUACOVER 20

September 2009

page 3/3

Overcoating table for Sigma Aquacover 20 for dft up to 75 µm

with water borne acrylic and alkyd fi nishes


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited



Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490






PDS 7149 177804 redbrown 2008002200 186582 RAL 7030 7030262200

ADDITIONAL DATA


REFERENCES

/3

September 20093 pages Revision of April 2007

one component water borne micaceous iron oxide pigmented primer based on acrylic dispersion

– particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons developed to give excellent adhesion to galvanised steel – fast drying – can be overcoated with most water borne acrylics, water borne epoxy –coatings and alkyd paints

redbrown - fl at


1.4 g/cm³ 40 ± 2% max. 35 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 50 g/l (approx. 0.4 lb/gal) 50 µm per coat 8 m²/l for 50 µm 15 - 30 minutes min. 4 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months

– galvanised steel; sweep blasted or otherwise roughened; dry and free from salts and other contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% –



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






SIGMA AQUACOVER 22

/3

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 22


long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5%















CLEANING SOLVENT

CLEANING PROCEDURE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/3

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 22


with water borne acrylic and alkyd fi nishes


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490






PDS 7145 140103 redbrown 2008002200

ADDITIONAL DATA


REFERENCES

/3


one component water borne micaceous iron oxide pigmented acrylic dispersion coating

– particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons contains non toxic pigments – excellent adhesion to various types of old or weathered paints – fast drying – can be overcoated with most water borne acrylics, water borne epoxy –coatings and alkyd paints as well as certain solvent borne two component products

standard mio colours available - fl at


1.5 g/cm³ 40 ± 2% max. 13 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 20 g/l (approx. 0.2 lb/gal) 50 - 75 µm per coat 8.0 m²/l for 50 µm, 5.3 m²/l for 75 µm 30 - 60 minutes min. 4 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months

– steel coated with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 20) galvanised steel coated with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 22) – previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination – substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% –

maintenance p.c. system sheets: 4012, 4022, 4032

– stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15°C, otherwise –extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance – must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport –


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C







SIGMA AQUACOVER 35

/3

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 35

long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5%














CLEANING SOLVENT

CLEANING PROCEDURE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/3

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 35


with itself substrate temperature

5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval










PDS 7203 various SAP codes

ADDITIONAL DATA


REFERENCES

/3


one component water borne acrylic dispersion fi nish

– particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons good weather resistance – good colour retention – fast drying – fast handling – not suitable for immersion in water –

RAL colours (other colours available on request) - semigloss


1.1 g/cm³ 42 ± 2% max. 12 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 14 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) 50 µm per coat 8.2 m²/l for 50 µm 30 minutes min. 4 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months

– steel coated with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 20) previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination – substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% –



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






SIGMA AQUACOVER 40

/3

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 40


long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5% * for localised areas of diffi cult access only














BRUSH/ROLLER * Recommended thinner Volume of thinner

CLEANING SOLVENT

CLEANING PROCEDURE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/3

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 40



5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval










PDS 7251 199310 base L 0710002197 199313 base Z 0070002185

ADDITIONAL DATA


REFERENCES

/3


one component water borne acrylic dispersion fi nish

– fi nish for interior accommodation, machinery spaces and superstructure particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and –safety reasons fast drying and recoatable – good weather resistance – good colour retention – allows safer working during hull outfi tting of new buildings – certifi cate for low fl ame spread: see sheet 1883 –

white (other colours on request) - gloss


1.2 g/cm³ 34 ± 2%, depending on colour max. 9 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 10 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) 50 µm per coat 6.8 m²/l for 50 µm 6 hours at 5°C, 3 hours at 10°C, 1 hour at 20°C min. 6 hours * max. unlimited * at least 12 months, keep above 0°C

– previous suitable coat; (e.g. Sigma Aquacover 25) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% –

marine system sheets: 3104, 3105

– stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15°C, otherwise –extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance – adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport –


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C







SIGMA AQUACOVER 45

/3

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 45















5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



CLEANING SOLVENT

CLEANING PROCEDURE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 45


Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434






PDS 7250 146103 white 7000002200 146104 white 7000001400


REFERENCES

/3

June 20093 pages

water borne high build acrylic coating

– reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard excellent adhesion to various types of old or weathered paints – fast drying – can be overcoated with dispersion paints – single coat application – excellent elongation (fl exible) –

grey RAL 7032 (other colours on request) - semigloss


1.2 g/cm³ 45 ± 2% max. 29 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 35 g/l (approx. 0.3 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 150 - 300 µm per coat 3.0 m²/l for 150 µm, 1.5 m²/l for 300 µm 4 hours * min. 6 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months * see additional data

– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing preferably relative humidity should not exceed 80% – clean, dry and free from any contamination – good ventilation is required during application and curing (please refer to –sheet 1433 and 1434)

– stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15°C, otherwise –extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance –


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






SIGMA AQUACOVER 80

/3

June 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 80

preferable not to be thinned, if necessary tap water



paint type: alkyd chlorinated rubber

epoxy pur

1st cleaning with Thinner

20-05 21-22 90-53 91-88






3rd cleaning with Thinner

none none 90-53 91-84

paint type: alkyd chlorinated rubber

epoxy pur





CLEANING SOLVENT

CLEANING PROCEDURE

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/3

June 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 80



10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval









PDS 7152

ADDITIONAL DATA


REFERENCES

/4


two component polyamine cured water borne epoxy primer

– general purpose epoxy primer in protective coating systems for steel structures in atmospheric exposure particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and –safety reasons excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres – good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel – free from lead and chromate containing pigments – can be overcoated with most dispersion and alkyd paints and 2 component –durable fi nishes easy application by brush/roller and (airless) spray –

grey (RAL 7038), buff (RAL 1015) - eggshell


1.3 g/cm³ 53 ± 2% max. 5 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 6 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 75 - 100 µm depending on system 7.1 m²/l for 75 µm, 5.3 m²/l for 100 µm 1.5 hour min. 2 hours (with itself) max. 6 months 4 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm or power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 galvanised steel; sweep blasted or otherwise roughened; dry and free from –salts and other contamination substrate temperature must be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



SIGMA AQUACOVER 200

/4

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 200


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above –15°C, otherwise extra water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much water results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure – water should be added after mixing the components – adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport –

none


tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)

tap water 0 - 5%







Induction time

Pot life



CLEANING SOLVENT

CLEANING PROCEDURE

/4

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 200










10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

with Sigma AquaCover 400 minimum interval

3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 45 min.

with SigmaDur 520, SigmaDur 550 minimum interval


maximum interval

6 months 6 months 6 months 6 months

Curing table for dft up to 100 µm


touch dry dry to handle full cure

10°C 3 hours 16 hours 6 days20°C 1.5 hour 5 hours 4 days30°C 1 hour 4 hours 3 days40°C 45 min. 3 hours 2 days


10°C 4 hours20°C 3 hours30°C 2 hours40°C 1 hour

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 200








PDS 7870 220700 RAL 7038 (grey) 7038262160 240678 RAL 1015 (buff) 1015262160


REFERENCES

/4


two component polyamine cured water borne epoxy coating

– general purpose epoxy build coat in protective coating systems for steel structures in atmospheric exposure particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and –safety reasons free from lead and chromate containing pigments – can be overcoated with most dispersion and alkyd paints and 2 component –durable fi nishes easy application by brush/roller and (airless) spray – suitable for concrete fl oors –

limited colour range available - semigloss due to the lead and chromate free pigmentation bright colours might have a reduced opacity a primer in a suitable colour may be necessary


1.3 g/cm³ 53 ± 2% max. 5 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 6 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 75 - 100 µm depending on system 7.1 m²/l for 75 µm, 5.3 m²/l for 100 µm 1.5 hour min. 2 hours (with itself) max. 6 months 4 days *



– steel with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 200); dry and free from any contamination and within the recoat times galvanised steel; sweep blasted or otherwise roughened; dry and free from –salts and other contamination substrate temperature must be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



SIGMA AQUACOVER 400

/4

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 400


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above –15°C, otherwise extra water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much water results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure – water should be added after mixing the components – adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport –

none


tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)

tap water 0 - 5%







Induction time

Pot life



CLEANING SOLVENT

CLEANING PROCEDURE

/4

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 400










10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

with itself minimum interval

3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 45 min.

with SigmaDur 520, SigmaDur 550 minimum interval


maximum interval





10°C 3 hours 18 hours 6 days20°C 1.5 hour 6 hours 4 days30°C 1 hour 5 hours 3 days40°C 45 min. 4 hours 2 days


10°C 4 hours20°C 3 hours30°C 2 hours40°C 1 hour

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMA AQUACOVER 400








PDS 7871 220702 RAL 5011 (grey) 5011262160


REFERENCES

/5

August 20105 pages Revision of September 2007

SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

two component moisture curing, water borne low zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer

– suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties – good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in –various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides regular, smooth weld seams – low fume release during welding and cutting – no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface – good thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work procedures – for use in sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic –protection systems please contact your nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales offi ce certifi ed by Lloyds, SLV and Newcastle OHH –

redbrown - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm³ 30 ± 2% 0 - 40 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) 0 - 25 g/l (0.0 - 0.3 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 18 μm - see further:"Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 15 m²/l for 18 μm * under optimal ventilation conditions:10 min. at substrate temperature of 20°C and6 min. at substrate temperature of 40°C min. 7 days max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition


binder: at least 9 months (store above 5°C)powder: at least 12 months (store powder moisture free)

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness

Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after

Overcoating interval


/5

August 2010

SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

– dry and free from oil and grease and any contamination steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm – on steel blasted to above profi le, the recommended dft, 18 μm, corresponds –to 22 μm as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed fi lm is 15 μm measured on a smooth test –panel substrate temperature should be between 25°C and 40°C – for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30°C - 35°C is –recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – relative humidity during curing should be above 50% – preferably the relative humidity should not exceed 85% – adequate ventilation is required –

fi rst coat shall be SigmaCover 280 or SigmaPrime 200 or other approved systems

– during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme –below where two possible surface treatments are indicated, the choice of treatment –is dependent on the location and on the system to be applied (see system sheets) the preferred pretreatment for optimal results is shown; other possibilities are –indicated in brackets

areas immersedconditions

atmospheric conditions

contamination to be removed to be removedweldseams ISO-Sa2½ (SPSS-Pt3) SPSS-Pt2burned ISO-Sa2½ (SPSS-Pt3) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)damaged corroded ISO-Sa2½ (SPSS-Pt3) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)white rust SPSS-ID Pt2 (SCAP *) SPSS-ID Pt1 (SCAP *) * cleaning by silicon carbide impregnated abrasive pad

Note that the back of welded plate may show discoloration (especially on plate where fi llets have been welded on), this is not to be confused with burned areas and does not require special treatment. Burned through areas may be present (this happens especially when welding thin steel) and these should then be treated as per 'burned areas' above.



SECONDARY SURFACE PREPARATION

/5

August 2010

SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

mixing ratio by weight: binder to powder 48 : 52

pour the binder in the empty steeldrum – add the powder to the binder – the temperature of the mixture of binder and powder should preferably be –above 15°C stir the powder thoroughly into the binder – stir thoroughly till homogeneous – strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen – mixed paint is ready for use – agitate continuously during application, adjust speed so foam formation will –be minimized best performance is obtained when sprayed steel structure stored dry for 24 –hours mixed paint should not be stored in closed containers, please consult your –local PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales offi ce

4 hours at 20°C

restrictor plate PN 029025 (Nordson) prior to nozzle no thinner should be added approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1140 - 1700 p.s.i.)

tap water and Thinner 70-05

Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: – pulsator fi lter and tip fi lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned –properly - following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment –when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)

Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne shop primer

paint type: solvent borne shop primer

1st cleaning with suitable cleaning thinner for previous product




Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure

CLEANING SOLVENT

CLEANING PROCEDURE

/5

August 2010

SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

Table 2: from water borne- to solvent borne shop primer



3rd cleaning with suitable cleaning thinner for the next product

paint type: solvent borne shop primer





Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Relative humidity - substrate temperature -air temperature see information sheet 1650

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/5

August 2010

SIGMA AQUAWELD 100






PDS 7124 268430 redbrown 2008002180

/4

September 20094 pages Revision of September 2005

two component polyamide cured epoxy primer

– epoxy primer in protective coating systems for concrete and sand/cement substrates (fl oors and walls) can be recoated with most two component coatings – good water resistance – fair chemical resistance to spillage and splash – resistant to impact and abrasion – easy to clean –

white - eggshell


1.4 g/cm³ 51 ± 2% max. 278 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 396 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) 35 µm 14.6 m²/l for 35 µm 30 minutes * min. 16 hours * max. 10 days * 7 days *



– concrete, sand/cement; dry and free from any contamination moisture content of concrete should be max. 4% – substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above –15°C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure – thinner should be added after mixing the components – for impregnation of concrete 30% thinner should be added –

none


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

SIGMACOVER 211

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 211

Thinner 91-92 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.33 mm (= 0.013 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)

Thinner 91-92 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 35 40 50

Overcoating table for SigmaCover 211 for dft up to 35 µm


10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

with most 2 component coatings minimum interval


maximum interval






CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 211




5°C 120 min. 6 hours 21 days10°C 60 min. 4 hours 14 days15°C 45 min. 3 hours 10 days20°C 30 min. 2 hours 7 days30°C 20 min. 1 hour 5 days

adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)


15°C 16 hours20°C 14 hours25°C 11 hours30°C 8 hours35°C 5 hours




REFERENCES

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 211






PDS 7406 179505 white 7000001400 179506 white 7000002200

/4

August 20114 pages Revision of March 2011

SIGMACOVER 240

two component high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating

– can be used directly to metal very good surface wetting – excellent corrosion resistance – outstanding (sea)water resistance – resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection – good resistance against chemically polluted water – good abrasion resistance – NAVSEA-MIL-PRF-4556-F approved – NAVSEA-MIL-PRF-23236-D approved – low temperature cure down to -18 °C –

limited colour range available - semigloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm³ 87 ± 2% max. 102 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 153 g/l (approx. 1.3 lb/gal) 100 - 300 μm depending on system * 8.7 m²/l for 100 μm * 5 hours min. 5 hours * max. 6 months *



– for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to • SPSS-Ss

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; pretreated preferably to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm or • according to ISO-St3, St2 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3• previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 240 or suitable primer) dry and free from • any contamination and within the minimum and maximum overcoating time substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point during • application and drying

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C




/4

August 2011

SIGMACOVER 240



15 minutes at 20°C

1.5 hour at 20°C * * see additional data


Thinner 90-58





dft in μm 100 300

Overcoating table for SigmaCover 240 for dft up to 300 μm


-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval *


maximum interval

6 months 6 months 6 months 6 months 6 months

* for polyurethane paints like SigmaDur 550 and SigmaDur 520 the minimum overcoating time should be raised with 50%

surface should be dry and free from any contamination – adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)


Induction time

Pot life


CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

August 2011

SIGMACOVER 240



touch dry for immersion in water

dry to handle

-5°C 28 hours 7 days 48 hours0°C 24 hours 7 days 30 hours10°C 10 hours 7 days 13 hours20°C 5 hours 7 days 8 hours30°C 3 hours 3 days 6 hours


15°C 2 hours20°C 90 min.30°C 40 min.




REFERENCES

/4

August 2011

SIGMACOVER 240






PDS 7991

/4

January 20114 pages Revision of August 2010

SIGMACOVER 256

two component high build polyamide cured recoatable zinc phosphate epoxy primer

– general purpose epoxy primer or build coat for steel and concrete structures suitable for atmospheric and marine conditions – can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings –even after long weathering periods lead- and chromate free – excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres – tough, with long term fl exibility – cures even at temperatures down to -10°C – good adhesion to steel, galvanised steel and aged epoxy coatings – easy application, both by airless spray and brush – can be used as epoxy primer/fi nish (for dry internal areas) –

cream, pink (other colours on request) - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 63 ± 2% max. 245 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 338 g/l (approx. 2.8 lb/gal) 75 - 150 μm depending on system 6.3 m²/l for 100 μm * 2 hours min. 3 hours * max. unlimited 4 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 / SSPC-SP3 – galvanised steel; free from any contamination and sweep blasted till an even –fl at appearance (only for internal dry exposure conditions) aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently –roughened during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10°C is –acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature at least 3°C above dew point – maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 95% –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/4

January 2011

SIGMACOVER 256



20 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10°Cnone above 10°C




Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 75 100 150


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

January 2011

SIGMACOVER 256

Overcoating table for dft up to 100 μm

for SigmaCover 256, SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 410


-5°C 5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

36 hours

10 hours

4hours

3 hours

2 hours

2hours

maximum interval

no limitation, provided that the surface is free from any contamination


for SigmaDur 520,SigmaDur 550,various chlorinated rubbers, vinyls, acrylates and alkyd paints


-5°C 5°C 10°C * 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

72 hours

24 hours

16 hours

8hours

5 hours

3 hours

maximum interval


fi nishes require a corresponding undercoat – SigmaCover 256 should not be overcoated with coal tar epoxy coatings –


substrate temperature dry to handle full cure-10°C 24 - 48 hours 20 days-5°C 24 - 30 hours 14 days0°C 18 - 24 hours 10 days5°C 18 hours 8 days10°C 12 hours 6 days15°C 8 hours 5 days20°C 6 hours 4 days30°C 4 hours 3 days40°C 3 hours 2 days


/4

January 2011

SIGMACOVER 256










PDS 7412 179630 cream 3012002200 179635 pink 6007002200


REFERENCES

/5

November 20105 pages Revision of February 2010

SIGMACOVER 280


– general purpose epoxy primer in protective coating systems for steel and non ferrous metals good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel – good adhesion to non ferrous metals – good fl ow and wetting properties – good water and corrosion resistance – cures at temperatures down to +5°C – suitable for touching up of weld seams and damages of epoxy coatings –during construction excellent recoatability – can be overcoated with most alkyd-, chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, epoxy- and –two component polyurethane coatings suitable on wet blast cleaned substrates (damp or dry) – compatible with well designed cathodic protection systems –

yellow/green (redbrown on request) - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 57 ± 2% max. 327 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 432 g/l (approx. 3.6 lb/gal) 50 - 100 μm depending on system 11.4 m²/l for 50 μm, 5.7 m²/l for 100 μm * 1.5 hour min. see tables * max. see tables * 7 days *



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after


/5

November 2010

SIGMACOVER 280

– for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned • (dry or wet) to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of • damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2 L (blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm)•

IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: – steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded • radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to • ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of • damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements•

for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 –removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust –size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnifi cation (ISO 8502-3:1992)

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm or • according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3• galvanised steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contamination and • roughened up

substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –

marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 5,7), 3107, 3108



none





Induction time

Pot life

/5

November 2010

SIGMACOVER 280



no extra thinner is necessary, but up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 50 75 100





CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

November 2010

SIGMACOVER 280


with various two pack epoxy- and polyurethane coatings


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval when not exposed to sunshine


maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine




with other types of paint like: most chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, alkyd coatings


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval


surface should be dry and free from any contamination – glossy fi nishes require a corresponding undercoat –




5°C 8 hours 13 hours 21 days10°C 4 hours 6 hours 14 days20°C 2 hours 2.5 hours 7 days30°C 1 hour 1.5 hour 5 days40°C 45 min. 1 hour 3 days


/5

November 2010

SIGMACOVER 280


15°C 10 hours20°C 8 hours30°C 5 hours35°C 4 hours


Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Ballast Tank Working Procedure New Building






PDS 7417 179083 yellow/green 4009002200 (144497 base, 142014 hardener) 179085 redbrown 6137002200 (144493 base, 142014 hardener)


REFERENCES

/6

February 20106 pages Revision of December 2006

SIGMACOVER 280 LT


– general purpose epoxy primer in protective coating systems for steel good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel – good fl ow and wetting properties – good water and corrosion resistance – suitable for touching up of weld seams and damages of epoxy coatings –during construction recoatable with most two component epoxy- and polyurethane coatings – compatible with well designed controlled cathodic protection systems – cures at temperatures down to -10°C –

yellow/green - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 57 ± 2% max. 332 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 438 g/l (approx. 3.7 lb/gal) 50 - 100 μm depending on system 11.4 m²/l for 50 μm, 5.7 m²/l for 100 μm * 3 hours min. 8 hours * max. see overcoating table * 7 days *



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 10°C


Full cure after


/6

February 2010

SIGMACOVER 280 LT

– for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned • (dry or wet) to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of • damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3

IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: – steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded • radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to • ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of • damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm

for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements – for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 –removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm

dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size • classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnifi cation (ISO 8502-3:1992)


substrate temperature should be between -10°C up to 15°C during –application and curing and at least 3°C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10°C is –possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –

marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 7, 8), 3107, 3108



none




Induction time

/6

February 2010

SIGMACOVER 280 LT





Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 50 75 100


Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/6

February 2010

SIGMACOVER 280 LT

Overcoating table for SigmaCover 280 LT for dft up to 75 μm

with various two pack epoxy- and polyurethane coatings


-10°C -5°C 0°C 5°C 10°C 15°C

minimum interval

48 hours

24 hours

16 hours

12 hours

8 hours 6 hours


3 months

3 months

3 months

2 months

2 months

1 month


2 months

2 months

2 months

1 month

1 month

1 month


Overcoating table for SigmaCover 280 LT for dft up to 75 μm

with other types of paint like: most chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, alkyd coatings


-10°C -5°C 0°C 5°C 10°C 15°C

minimum interval

24 hours

16 hours

12 hours

8 ours

4 hours

3 hours

maximum interval

10 days 10 days 7 days 4 days 4 days 4 days

surface should be dry and free from any contamination – glossy fi nishes require a corresponding undercoat –

/6

February 2010

SIGMACOVER 280 LT




-10°C 20 hours 32 hours 21 days-5°C 10 hours 16 hours 14 days5°C 5 hours 6 hours 9 days10°C 3 hours 4 hours 7 days15°C 2 hours 3 hours 5 days



5°C 10 hours10°C 8 hours




REFERENCES

/6

February 2010

SIGMACOVER 280 LT






PDS 7424 181451 yellow/green 4009002200 (144497 base, 181453 hardener)

/5


two component high build polyamine adduct cured coaltar epoxy coating

– outstanding (sea)water resistance (outside hull and ballast tanks) outstanding water and crude oil resistance – excellent corrosion resistance – good resistance against chemically polluted water – can be applied and cures at low temperatures (application possible down to –-5°C, provided the substrate is free from ice) good abrasion resistance – Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 – resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection –

black, brown - eggshell


1.5 g/cm³ 71 ± 2% max. 207 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 305 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 125 - 500 µm (see system sheets) 5.7 m²/l for 125 µm * 4 hours min. 6 hours * max. 5 days * 7 days *



– for immersion in water, with cathodic protection: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to• SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 existing coal tar epoxy coating; suffi ciently roughened and free from any • contamination

for immersion in water, without cathodic protection: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power • tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 existing coal tar epoxy coating; suffi ciently roughened and free from any • contamination

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L•

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



SIGMACOVER 300

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 300

steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 or • SPSS-Pt3 existing coal tar epoxy coating; suffi ciently roughened and free from any • contamination

in order to obtain the maximum resistance against chemical- and mechanical –infl uences the substrate temperature should be above 5°C during application and curing application at temperatures down to -5°C is possible but curing to hardness –takes longer and complete cure will be reached when temperature increases substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point –

marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3106, 3107



none


Thinner 91-79 0 - 5% for a dft of 250 µm10 - 15% for a dft of 125 µm approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)


only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-79 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53



Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner

Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure



CLEANING SOLVENT

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 300




theoretical spreading rate m²/l 5.7 2.8 2.4 1.8 1.4

dft in µm 125 250 300 400 500

max. dft when brushing (touch up and spot repair): 125 µm

Overcoating table for dft up to 250 µm


-5°C 5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

with SigmaCover 300 and SigmaCover 510 and other compatible paints

minimum interval

48 hours

24 hours

18 hours

12 hours

6 hours

4 hours

3 hours


21 days

21 days

12 days

8 days

4 days

3 days

2 days

maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine

40 days

40 days

30 days

24 days

18 days

14 days

7 days

surface should be dry and free from any contamination – when overcoated with other paints, tar bleeding will occur – when overcoating work is to be carried out on coats thicker than 250 µm –applied in one coat, the minimum overcoating interval must be extended as follows: for 300 µm : 2 times as long for 400 µm : 3 times as long for 500 µm : 4 times as long adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 300



dry to handle initial curefor exposure to sea water and to slightly polluted atmosphere

full curefor immersion in polluted water or crude oil

5°C 48 hours 96 hours --10°C 30 hours 48 hours 15 days15°C 24 hours 30 hours 10 days20°C 16 hours 24 hours 7 days30°C 8 hours 18 hours 3 days40°C 5 hours 12 hours 2 days


Drydockings exposure to sea water is permitted after the initial curing time – if SigmaCover 300 has been applied by means of hot airless spray, –exposure to sea water is permitted after an initial cure of 4 hours at dfts ranging from 250 - 500 µm applied in a one coat application the –curing times have to be doubled in order to obtain suffi cient mechanical strength the mechanical strength, when cured at low temperature, is low initially, but –will increase quickly when exposed to sea water





/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 300







PDS 7472 179000 black 8000002200 178998 brown 2000002200

REFERENCES

/5


two component high build polyamine adduct cured coaltar epoxy primer/coating

– outstanding sea water resistance (outside hull and ballast tanks) excellent corrosion resistance – good resistance against chemically polluted water – cures even at temperatures down to -10°C – rapid throughput of work can be maintained even at low temperatures – resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection –

black, brown - eggshell


1.5 g/cm³ 71 ± 2% max. 207 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 305 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 125 - 250 µm 5.7 m²/l for 125 µm, 2.8 m²/l for 250 µm * 6 hours min. 12 hours * max. see overcoating table * 7 days *



– for immersion in water, with or without cathodic protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to• SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 existing suitable epoxy coating or coaltar epoxy coating; in sound • condition and suffi ciently roughened and free from any contamination

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 or • SPSS-Pt3 existing suitable epoxy coating or coaltar epoxy coating; in sound • condition and suffi ciently roughened and free from any contamination

substrate temperature should be between -10°C up to 15°C during –application and curing and at least 3°C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 10°C


Full cure after



SIGMACOVER 300 LT

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 300 LT

during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10°C is –possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –




none


Thinner 91-79 0 - 5% for a dft of 250 µm10 - 15% for a dft of 125 µm approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)



Thinner 90-53





Induction time

Pot life





CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 300 LT



dft in µm 125 250

max. dft when brushing (touch up and spot repair): 70 µm



-10°C 0°C 10°C 15°C

minimum interval


with SigmaCover 300 and SigmaCover 510 and other compatible paints





surface should be dry and free from any contamination and ice – when overcoated with other paints, tar bleeding will occur – when overcoating work is to be carried out on coats thicker than 125 µm –applied in one coat, the minimum overcoating interval must be extended as follows: for 250 µm : 2 times as long for 375 µm : 3 times as long for 500 µm : 4 times as long adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) when application has to be executed at low temperature care should be –taken that the temperature of the mixed paint is at least 15°C, the induction time should be increased to at least one hour

ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 300 LT



dry to handle initial curefor exposure to sea water and to slightly polluted atmosphere

full curefor immersion in polluted water or crude oil

-10°C 72 hours 12 days ---5°C 48 hours 7 days 21 days0°C 30 hours 5 days 15 days5°C 20 hours 3 days 10 days10°C 12 hours 48 hours 7 days15°C 8 hours 42 hours 5 days







REFERENCES

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 300 LT






PDS 7483 179014 brown 2000002200 179015 black 8000002200

/4


SIGMACOVER 385

two component high build multi purpose epoxy primer/ coating

– general purpose epoxy primer or build coat for steel and concrete structures suitable for atmospheric and marine conditions – can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings –even after long weathering periods lead- and chromate free – excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres – tough, with long term fl exibility – good adhesion to steel, galvanised steel and aged epoxy coatings – easy application, both by airless spray and brush –

white, oxide red, black, buff - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 68 ± 2% max. 231 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 326 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 276 g/ltr (2.3 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) 100 - 200 μm depending on system * 6.8 m²/l for 100 μm * 2 hours min. 8 hours * max. 6 months ( with itself) 4 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 / SSPC-SP3 – aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently –roughened substrate temperature should be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing




DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Pot life

/4

September 2011

SIGMACOVER 385



Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 100 200



10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

6 months 6 months 6 months




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2011

SIGMACOVER 385


with polyurethanes substrate temperature

10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

42 days 30 days 14 days





10°C 4 hours20°C 2.5 hours30°C 1.5 hour




REFERENCES

/4

September 2011

SIGMACOVER 385






PDS 7453

/4

August 20114 pages Revision of May 2011

SIGMACOVER 410

two component high solids, high build, polyamide cured epoxy coating pigmented with micaceous iron oxide (MIO) or in selected colours

– general purpose epoxy build coat in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions excellent durability – can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings –even after long weathering periods easy application by airless spray – available in MIO or conventional pigmented grade –

MIO and a selected range of colours - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.9 g/cm³ (MIO) ,1.5 g/cm³ (conventional pigmented grade) 80 ± 2% max. 126 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 240 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 75 - 200 μm depending on system 10.0 m²/l for 75 μm * 3 hours * min. 10 hours * max. 6 months * 7 days *



– previous suitable primer; dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts, and suffi ciently roughened if necessary when applied to zinc silicate, a mist coat and full coat technique is required – substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing



none


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

/4

August 2011

SIGMACOVER 410

Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, 30 - 40% when mist coat applied approx. 0.45 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 20 - 25 MPa (= 200 - 250 bar; 2800 - 3500 p.s.i.)

Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Application by brush may show brush marking, due to the thixatropic nature of the paint and is most suitable to small areas, tight angle areas or for stripe coating or touch up. Application by roller will leave roller marking and is suitable for minimum dft requirements only. A roller suitable for epoxy application only must be used.

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 75 150 200



5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

for various two pack epoxy- or polyurethane paint

minimum interval


maximum interval *

-- -- -- -- --

* This product has an unlimited maximum overcoating interval provided –the surface is free from chalking and other contamination. In cases of exposure to direct sunlight or when the surface is contaminated it –is recommended that the surface be cleaned and roughened to ensure good adhesion of the subsequent coating. The optimum intercoat adhesion is obtained when the subsequent coating is –applied before the full cure time of the previous coating has elapsed.



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

August 2011

SIGMACOVER 410




5°C 12 hours 30 hours 20 days10°C 6 hours 24 hours 14 days15°C 4 hours 10 hours 10 days20°C 3 hours 8 hours 7 days30°C 2 hours 6 hours 5 days40°C 1.5 hour 4 hours 3 days



10°C 12 hours15°C 10 hours20°C 6 hours25°C 4 hours30°C 3 hours40°C 2 hours




REFERENCES

/4

August 2011

SIGMACOVER 410






PDS 6823

/5

May 20115 pages Revision of August 2010

SIGMACOVER 435

two component high build micaceous iron oxide pigmented polyamide cured recoatable epoxy coating

– general purpose epoxy build coat or fi nish in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions easy application, both by airless spray and brush – cures even at temperatures down to -10°C – a high relative humidity max. 95%, during application and curing does not –infl uence the quality of the coating good adhesion on most aged, sound alkyd-, chlorinated rubber- and epoxy –coatings can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings –even after long weathering periods resistant to water and splash of mild chemicals – excellent durability – tough, with long term fl exibility – resistant to temperatures up to 200°C (see system sheet 4062) –

light grey (9553-05), dark grey ( 9558-05), green (9441-05), aluminium (9590-05) - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 63 ± 2% max. 241 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 344 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 75 - 150 μm depending on system 6.3 m²/l for 100 μm * 2 hours min. 3 hours * max. unlimited 4 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS –or powertool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 previous coat; dry and free from any contamination – during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10°C is –acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Curing time



/5

May 2011

SIGMACOVER 435




none

6 hours at 20°C * see additional data



Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 75 100 150




Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

May 2011

SIGMACOVER 435


for SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456


-5°C 5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

36 hours

10 hours

4 hours

3 hours

2 hours

2 hours

maximum interval

no limitation

surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination –


for Sigma Vikote 46, SigmaDur 550, SigmaDur 520 and Sigmarine 40


-5°C 5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

72 hours

24 hours

16 hours

8 hours

5 hours

3 hours

maximum interval

no limitation

surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination – fi nishes require a corresponding undercoat – SigmaCover 435 should not be overcoated with coal tar epoxy coatings –

/5

May 2011

SIGMACOVER 435



In exceptional cases SigmaCover 435 may be applied at lower substrate temperatures (down to -15°C) provided that the surface is free from ice and other contamination. In such cases special care must be taken to avoid thick fi lm application as this may lead to checking/crazing or solvent entrapment.It should be clear that application at lower temperatures will require additional thinning to obtain application viscosity, however this will affect the sag resistance of the applied coating and can induce solvent retention. Optimal curing and designed product properties will only be achieved when minimum required substrate temperature is reached.







REFERENCES

/5

May 2011

SIGMACOVER 435






PDS 7465 179025 lightgrey 9553052200 179496 darkgrey 9558052200

/5

August 20105 pages Revision of September 2009

SIGMACOVER 456

two component high build polyamide cured recoatable epoxy coating

– general purpose epoxy build coat or fi nish in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions easy application, both by airless spray and brush – cures even at temperatures down to -10°C – a high relative humidity max. 95%, during application and curing does not –infl uence the quality of the coating good adhesion on most aged, sound alkyd-, chlorinated rubber- and epoxy –coatings can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings –even after long weathering periods resistant to water and splash of mild chemicals – excellent durability – tough, with long term fl exibility –

white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) - semigloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 65 ± 2% (white); 62 - 65 ± 2% (colours) max. 250 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 347 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 75 - 150 μm depending on system 6.5 m²/l for 100 μm, 8.7 m²/l for 75 μm * 2 hours min. 3 hours * max. unlimited 4 days *



– previous coat; dry and free from any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10°C is –acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point –


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Curing time




/5

August 2010

SIGMACOVER 456



none

6 hours at 20°C * see additional data



Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 75 100 150



Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

August 2010

SIGMACOVER 456


for SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456


-5°C 5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

36 hours

10 hours

4 hours

3 hours

2 hours

2 hours

maximum interval

no limitation



for Sigma Vikote 46, SigmaDur 550, SigmaDur 520 and Sigmarine 40


-5°C 5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

72 hours

24 hours

16 hours

8 hours

5 hours

3 hours

maximum interval

no limitation

for Sigma Vikote 56 *and Sigmarine 48 *

maximum interval

17 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 4 days 2 days

* colour of SigmaCover 456 should be adapted to the colour of Sigma Vikote 56 or Sigmarine 48

surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination – fi nishes require a corresponding undercoat – SigmaCover 456 should not be overcoated with coal tar epoxy coatings –

/5

August 2010

SIGMACOVER 456



In exceptional cases SigmaCover 456 may be applied at lower substrate temperatures (down to -15°C) provided that the surface is free from ice and other contamination. In such cases special care must be taken to avoid thick fi lm application as this may lead to checking/crazing or solvent entrapment. It should be clear that application at lower temperatures will require additional thinning to obtain application viscosity, however this will affect the sag resistance of the applied coating and can induce solvent retention.Optimal curing and designed product properties will only be achieved when minimum required substrate temperature is reached.







REFERENCES

/5

August 2010

SIGMACOVER 456






PDS 7466 179073 white 7000002200

/4


two component high solids polyamide cured recoatable zinc phosphate epoxy primer/coating

– general purpose epoxy primer/coating for steel and concrete structures in atmospheric exposure can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings –even after long weathering periods free from lead and chromate containing pigments – excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres – tough, with long term fl exibility – cures at temperatures down to -5°C – good adhesion to steel – easy application, both by airless spray and brush –

cream (other colours on request) - eggshell


1.4 g/cm³ 73 ± 2% max. 192 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 277 g/l (approx. 2.3 lb/gal) 75 - 150 µm depending on system 7.3 m²/l for 100 µm * 8 hours min. 8 hours * max. unlimited 4 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination – during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5°C is –acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



SIGMACOVER 456 HS

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 456 HS



20 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10°Cnone above 10°C




Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 75 100 150


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 456 HS

Overcoating table for SigmaCover 456 HS for dft up to 150 µm


-5°C 5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

48 hours

20 hours

16 hours

8 hours

6 hours

4 hours

maximum interval

unlimited

surface should be dry and free from any contamination – for polyurethane paints the minimum overcoating time should be raised with –100%


substrate temperature dry to handle full cure-5°C 24 - 48 hours 14 days0°C 24 - 30 hours 10 days5°C 18 - 24 hours 8 days10°C 18 hours 6 days15°C 12 hours 5 days20°C 8 hours 4 days30°C 6 hours 3 days40°C 4 hours 2 days



10°C 8 hours15°C 5 hours20°C 4 hours30°C 2.5 hours35°C 2 hours



/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 456 HS







PDS 7712 215902 cream 9010262200

REFERENCES

/4


two component chemical resistant fi nish based on polyamide cured epoxy resins

– general purpose epoxy fi nish easy application by brush/roller and (airless) spray – good water resistance – good chemical resistance to spillage and splash – resistant to impact and abrasion – easy to clean –

selected range of colours is available - semigloss


1.4 g/cm³ 50 ± 2% max. 308 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 418 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 50 µm 10.0 m²/l * 30 minutes * min. 8 hours * max. 2 - 3 months * 7 days *



– previous epoxy coats; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing




DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Pot life

SIGMACOVER 480

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 480



Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 40 50 60



5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval






CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 480




5°C 4 hours 12 hours 21 days10°C 2 hours 8 hours 14 days15°C 1 hour 6 hours 10 days20°C 30 min. 4 hours 7 days30°C 30 min. 3 hours 5 days







REFERENCES

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 480






PDS 7441 179559 white 7000002200

/4


two component micaceous iron oxide pigmented polyamide cured epoxy primer/sealer/coating

– may be used as a primer, sealer or coating excellent adhesion to and sealing of weathered, cleaned zinc rich primers –and metal sprayed steel good adhesion to properly pretreated galvanised steel – excellent adhesion to blast cleaned steel – can be used in systems for atmospheric or water immersed exposure –conditions good resistance to industrial or chemical contaminated atmospheric –exposure conditions good abrasion and impact resistance – good adhesion characteristics for subsequent coats – resistant to temperatures up to 200°C in dry atmospheric exposure –conditions

redbrown, greenish grey - low metallic sheen


1.8 g/cm³ 60 ± 2% max. 210 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 374 g/l (approx. 3.1 lb/gal) 40 - 80 µm depending on system * 15 m²/l for 40 µm * 2 hours * min. 8 hours * max. 1 month * 7 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to –SPSS-Pt3 zinc primed steel; free from any contamination and zinc salts – galvanised steel; for atmospheric exposure conditions disc sanding, free –from any contamination and zinc salts; for water immersed exposure conditions sweep blasting is required not weathered metal sprayed steel; free from any contamination and salts – previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



SIGMACOVER 522

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 522

substrate temperature should be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing for atmospheric exposure conditions the minimum substrate temperature –for application may be 5°C, but at low temperature the curing slows down according to the overcoating and curing tables

REMARK when used as an adhesion primer or when a long overcoating interval is expected a max. dft of 50 µm must be specifi ed in order to preserve the rough texture



none


Thinner 91-92 5 - 10% for dft of approx. 80 µm25 - 30% for dft of approx. 40 µm when used for sealing inorganic zinc and metal sprayed steel approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1700 - 2130 p.s.i.)


Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53




Induction time

Pot life





CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 522



dft in µm 40 80

Overcoating table for SigmaCover 522


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum intervaldft 50 µm


minimum intervaldft 80 µm

3 days 32 hours 16 hours 12 hours 8 hours

maximum interval



Note the minimum overcoating time should be multiplied by 5 when SigmaCover –522 is to be applied on top of an existing old (alkyd) primer or coating the maximum overcoating time of SigmaCover 522 could be extended up to –6 months provided the dft is not higher than 50 µm surface should be properly cleaned – glossy fi nishes require an adhesion promoting undercoat –




5°C 8 hours 18 hours 20 days10°C 5 hours 8 hours 15 days15°C 3.5 hours 6 hours 10 days20°C 2 hours 4 hours 7 days25°C 1.5 hour 4 hours 5 days

adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for optimum resistance in tankcoating systems a minimum substrate –temperature of 10°C is essential

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 522










PDS 7420 179510 greenish grey 9048052200 179508 redbrown 9028052200


REFERENCES

/5

September 20095 pages Revision of November 2007

two component surface tolerant high build polyamine cured epoxy primer/coating

– surface tolerant coating for lower grade of steel preparation particularly suited as maintenance coating for dry cargo holds, decks and –hulls general purpose epoxy build coat or fi nish in protective coating systems –for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions compatible with various aged coatings – overcoatable with most types of coatings – excellent corrosion resistance – resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals – good fl exibility –

green, grey, redbrown, black, aluminium - semigloss


1.4 g/cm³ 83 ± 2% max. 166 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 232 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 60 - 100 µm for brush/roller125 - 200 µm for airless spray 6.6 m²/l for 125 µm, 4.1 m²/l for 200 µm 6 hours min. 9 hours * max. 9 months * 7 days



– for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ for excellent corrosion protection• steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm or power tool • cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3• coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L• existing sound epoxy coating systems and most sound alkyd coating • systems; suffi ciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C



Curing time



SIGMACOVER 630

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 630

for immersion in sea water: –(resistant to Cathodic Protection in systems)

steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to• SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 • fi rst coat SigmaCover 630 aluminium

substrate temperature should be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point



none




Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53




Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 630


theoretical spreading rate m²/l 13.8 6.6 8.3 4.1

dft in µm for airless spray 125 200

dft in µm for brush/roller 60 100

max. dft when brushing: 100 µm



10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

with various two pack epoxy coatings

minimum interval


with polyurethanes minimum interval


with itself maximum interval


with various epoxy- and polyurethane coatings

maximum interval

6 months 3 months 1 month 1 month




10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

with various alkyds minimum interval


maximum interval


after exceeding of the maximum interval, glossy fi nishes require a –corresponding undercoat surface should be dry and free from any contamination – best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before –the preceding coat is fully cured if this time is exceeded it may be necessary to roughen the surface –

ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 630




10°C 14 hours 20 hours 15 days20°C 6 hours 9 hours 7 days30°C 4 hours 5 hours 4 days40°C 2 hours 3 hours 2 days



15°C 3 hours20°C 2 hours30°C 1 hour40°C 0.5 hour




REFERENCES

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 630






PDS 7430 179099 green 4199052200 179101 grey 5177052200 179103 redbrown 6179052200 179105 black 8000002200 179106 aluminium 9000002200 179583 RAL 6002 6002262200 179586 offwhite 7001002200

/4

November 20104 pages Revision of September 2009

SIGMACOVER 630 LT

two component surface tolerant high solids polyamine cured epoxy primer/coating

– self priming coating tolerant to lower grades of steel preparation for atmospheric exposure cures at temperatures down to -5°C – particularly well suited as maintenance coating for steel structures – excellent corrosion resistance – resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals – good abrasion resistance – good fl exibility – compatible with various aged coatings – good recoatability with most epoxy-, polyurethane-, chlorinated rubber-, –alkyd- and acrylic paints

grey, offwhite (other colours on request) - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 85 ± 2% (for offwhite) max. 190 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 268 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal) 60 - 150 μm 14.2 m²/l for 60 μm, 5.7 m²/l for 150 μm 12 hours * min. 16 hours * max. 2 months * 7 days



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ for excellent corrosion protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm or power tool –cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 – existing sound epoxy coating systems and most sound alkyd coating –systems; suffi ciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point during –application and curing

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 10°C


Curing time



/4

November 2010

SIGMACOVER 630 LT



15 minutes, for substrate temperatures below +10°C




Thinner 91-92 or Thinner 91-99 for better fl ow 5 - 10%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 60 100 150


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

November 2010

SIGMACOVER 630 LT



-5°C 0°C 5°C 10°C 20°C


minimum interval


maximum interval





-5°C 0°C 5°C 10°C 20°C



maximum interval

1 month 1 month 1 month 1 month 1 month

after exceeding of the maximum interval, glossy fi nishes require a –corresponding undercoat surface should be dry and free from any contamination – best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before –the preceding coat is fully cured if this time is exceeded it may be necessary to roughen the surface –




-5°C 48 hours 48 hours 21 days0°C 24 hours 24 hours 14 days5°C 18 hours 20 hours 10 days10°C 12 hours 16 hours 7 days20°C 4 hours 8 hours 5 days


/4

November 2010

SIGMACOVER 630 LT


0°C 3 hours10°C 2 hours20°C 1 hour








PDS 7434 179613 base L 20 ltr 179609 base Z 20 ltr 173524 clear hardener


REFERENCES

/3

March 20113 pages Revision of September 2010

SIGMACOVER 640

two component high solids epoxy coating

– high performance self priming universal epoxy high solids, low VOC – surface tolerant and abrasion resistant – compatible with prepared damp surfaces – good adhesion on most existing coatings – available in a wide colour range – also available with MIO pigmentation – good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals –


(data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ (white) 87 ± 2% max. 114 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 163 g/l (approx. 1.4 lb/gal) 180 g/ltr (1.5 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) 100 - 200 μm 8.7 m²/l for 100 μm * 6 hours * min. 16 hours * max. see tables *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ – concrete and other cement-bonded substrates; dry, hard and free from –contamination such as laitance, grease and dust aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently –roughened for single pack coatings; extra precautions are necessary –


the paint should be stirred well before use, preferably by means of a –mechanical mixer, to ensure homogeneity add cure to resin and continue stirring until homogeneous –

2 hours at 20°C

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS





Pot life

/3

March 2011

SIGMACOVER 640

no extra thinner needed approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 - 18 MPa (= approx. 150 - 180 bar; 2130 - 2560 p.s.i.)

Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions

– apply evenly, using a well loaded brush or roller application by brush or roller will provide approx. 80 microns dft in a single –coat application

Thinner 90-58




dft in μm 100 125 200


Overcoating table for SigmaCover 640 for dft at 125 μm


10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

extended *

* This product has an extended maximum overcoating time. Surfaces to be overcoated must be clean and dry. Any contamination must be identifi ed and adequately removed. Particular attention must be paid to surfaces that have been exposed to heat and/o rsunlight and where chalking may be present. A degree of surface cleaning will be required. Your PPG representative can advise onsuitable cleaning methods.


AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner

BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

March 2011

SIGMACOVER 640

Curing table for dft at 125 μm



10°C 24 hours 48 hours 21 days20°C 6 hours 20 hours 7 days30°C 3 hours 5 hours 4 days40°C 1 hour 3 hours 2 days

during the curing period precautions must be taken to avoid contact of the –coating with moisture, otherwise blushing may occur


Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Surface preparation of concrete (fl oors) see information sheet 1496






PDS 7988


REFERENCES

/3

March 20113 pages Revision of December 2009

SIGMACOVER 640 ALUMINIUM


– high performance self priming universal epoxy high solids, low VOC – surface tolerant and abrasion resistant – compatible with prepared damp surfaces – good adhesion on most existing coatings – good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals –

aluminium - semigloss

(data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 85 ± 2% max. 157 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 196 g/l (approx. 1.6 lb/gal) 125 μm 6.8 m²/l for 125 μm * 6 hours * min. 16 hours * max. see tables *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ – aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently –roughened substrate temperature should be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point



4 hours at 20°C


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS





Pot life


/3

March 2011




Thinner 90-58



Overcoating table for SigmaCover 640 Aluminium for dft at 125 μm


10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

extended *

* This product has an extended maximum overcoating time. Surfaces to be overcoated must be clean and dry. Any contamination must be identifi ed and adequately removed. Particular attention must be paid to surfaces that have been exposed to heat and/or sunlight and where chalking may be present. A degree of surface cleaning will be required. Your PPG representative can advise on suitable cleaning methods.




10°C 16 hours 72 hours 21 days20°C 6 hours 24 hours 7 days30°C 4 hours 10 hours 4 days



BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

March 2011









PDS 7992


REFERENCES

/3


SIGMACOVER 640 ALUMINIUM LT


– low temperature curing down to 0°C high performance self priming universal epoxy – high solids, low VOC – surface tolerant and abrasion resistant – compatible with prepared damp surfaces – good adhesion on most existing coatings – good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals –

aluminium - semigloss

(data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 79 ± 2% max. 197 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 240 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 125 μm 6.3 m²/l for 125 μm * 7 hours * min. 16 hours * max. see tables *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ – aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently –roughened substrate temperature should be above 0°C and at least 3°C above dew –point



2.5 hours at 10°C


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS





Pot life


/3

March 2011




Thinner 90-58



Overcoating table for SigmaCover 640 Aluminium LT for dft at 125 μm


5°C 10°C 20°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

extended *








BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

March 2011









PDS 7993


REFERENCES

/3

March 20113 pages Revision of November 2009

SIGMACOVER 640 LT


– low temperature curing down to 0°C high performance self priming universal epoxy – high solids, low VOC – surface tolerant and abrasion resistant – compatible with prepared damp surfaces – good adhesion on most existing coatings – available in a wide colour range – also available with MIO pigmentation – good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals –


(data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ (white) 88 ± 2% max. 114 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 163 g/l (approx. 1.4 lb/gal) 180 g/ltr (1.5 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) 100 - 200 μm 8.8 m²/l for 100 μm * 6 hours * min. 14 hours * max. see tables *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ – concrete and other cement-bonded substrates; dry, hard and free from –contamination such as laitance, grease and dust aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently –roughened for single pack coatings; extra precautions are necessary –



1 hour at 20°C

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS





Pot life

/3

March 2011

SIGMACOVER 640 LT




Thinner 90-58




dft in μm 100 125 200


Overcoating table for SigmaCover 640 LT for dft at 125 μm


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

extended *




BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

March 2011

SIGMACOVER 640 LT


substrate temperature dry to handle full cure10°C 16 hours 14 days20°C 5 hours 7 days









PDS 7989


REFERENCES

/3

January 20103 pages

SIGMACOVER 640 SEALER (Amerlock Sealer)

two component surface tolerant solvent free rust penetrating epoxy sealer

– penetrates rust and adheres to aged coatings surface tolerant coating for lower grade of steel preparation – primer for concrete surfaces – good fl ow and wetting properties – overcoatable with most types of coatings –

clear - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.1 g/cm³ 100% max. 0 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 0 g/l (0 lb/gal) 40 µm 25 m²/l for 40 µm 12 hours * max. 1 month * min. 24 hours 7 days *



– concrete, sand/cement; dry and free from any contamination moisture content of concrete should be max. 4% – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good –corrosion protection substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing


for airless application the temperature of base and hardener should be at –least 15°C lower temperatures possible for roller application – no thinner should be added –

none

approx. 1 hour at 20°C * * see additional data

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

/3

January 2010


no thinner should be added approx. 0.43 mm (= 0.017 in) at 20°C (paint temperature) min. 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)

– ROLLER: nylon suitable for 2 component epoxy with hair length 8 mm BRUSH: for stripe coating and spot repair only –

no thinner should be added

Thinner 90-58



spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask and gloves should be used –during spraying ventilation should be provided in confi ned spaces to maintain good visibility –



5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

for various two pack epoxies minimum interval


maximum interval

1 month 1 month 1 month 1 month

surface should be dry and free from any contamination – best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before –the fully cured stage is reached if this time is exceeded the surface has to be roughened –




5°C 24 hours 48 hours 21 days10°C 18 hours 36 hours 14 days20°C 12 hours 28 hours 7 days30°C 8 hours 24 hours 3 days



BRUSH/ROLLER

Recommended thinner

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

January 2010



20°C 60 min.30°C 30 min.

due to exothermic reaction, temperature during pot life may increase up to 60°C at gel point


Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 explosion hazard- toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434






PDS 7995


REFERENCES

/4


two component high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating

– can be used directly to metal very good surface wetting – excellent corrosion resistance – outstanding (sea)water resistance – resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection – good resistance against chemically polluted water – good abrasion resistance – tar free –

limited colour range available - gloss


1.6 g/cm³ 82 ± 2% max. 158 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 221 g/l (approx. 1.8 lb/gal) 150 µm depending on system 5.5 m²/l for 150 µm * 3 hours min. 16 hours * max. 28 days * 3 days *



– for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to • SPSS-Ss substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew • point during application and curing

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; pretreated preferably to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm or • according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3• previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 805 or suitable primer) dry and free from • any contamination and within the minimum and maximum overcoating time substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew • point during application and curing

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Ready for immersion



SIGMACOVER 805

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 805





Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 150



5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval *


maximum interval


* for polyurethane paints like SigmaDur 550 and SigmaDur 520 the minimum overcoating time should be raised with 50%



Pot life


CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 805


substrate temperature for immersion in water5°C 10 days10°C 7 days15°C 5 days20°C 3 days30°C 2.5 days40°C 1.5 day


15°C 3 hours20°C 2 hours30°C 1 hour40°C 0.5 hour




REFERENCES

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 805






PDS 7726 182345 offwhite 7001002200 190856 brown 2000002200 182348 black 8000002200

/5

September 20095 pages Revision of December 2008

two component solvent free amine cured epoxy coating

– one coat protection for steel structures with excellent corrosion resistance can be applied at a dft up to 1000 µm by heavy duty single feed airless –spray equipment (60:1) one coat heavy duty deck system – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard – good visibility due to light colour – resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection – can be immersed in (sea)water after 4 hours of curing at 20°C –

grey (other colours on request) - gloss


1.4 g/cm³ 100% max. 62 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 86 g/l (approx. 0.7 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 min. 500 - 1000 µm depending on system 2.0 m²/l for 500 µm 12 hours * min. 20 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days *



– for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 µm• shop primed steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 • µm coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm)•

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 µm• coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm)•


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



SIGMACOVER 1000

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 1000



none


– heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down –of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line –heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to –approx. 30°C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible –








Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY


BRUSH Recommended thinner

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 1000



dft in µm 500 1000

min. dft for closed fi lm with airless spray: 400 µmmax. dft when brushing: 150 µm

measuring wet fi lm thickness a difference is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the –real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which –retards the release of air trapped in the paint fi lm for some time a practical recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specifi ed –dft plus 60 µm


Overcoating table for SigmaCover 1000 for dft up to 1000 µm(for spot repair and stripe coating only)


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 1000




5°C 48 hours 3 days 14 days10°C 24 hours 2 days 10 days20°C 12 hours 24 hours 5 days30°C 8 hours 16 hours 3 days40°C 6 hours 12 hours 2 days

early exposure to sea water is permitted after the initial cure of 3 hours at –20°C


20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.





REFERENCES

/5

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 1000






PDS 7450 179640 grey 5000002200

/4


two component surface tolerant solvent free polyamine cured epoxy primer/coating

– general purpose primer/buildcoat for long term protection of steel structures excellent corrosion resistance – compatible with various aged coating like aged alkyd, epoxy and –polyurethane reduces explosion risk and fi re hazard in confi ned spaces – good fl ow and wetting properties – can be used from temperatures above 5°C – can be applied by roller –

grey - gloss


1.4 g/cm³ 99 ± 1% max. 2 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 3 g/l (approx. 0.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 125 µm 7.9 m²/l for 125 µm 12 hours * max. see tables * min. see tables * 7 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ for excellent corrosion protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good –corrosion protection steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to –SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 stainless steel; degreased and blast cleaned to roughness of –40 - 70 µm existing sound epoxy coating, polyurethane and most sound alkyd coating –systems; suffi ciently roughened dry and cleaned substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 80% –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



SIGMACOVER 1500

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 1500


for airless application the temperature of base and hardener should be at –least 20°C lower temperatures possible for roller application – no thinner should be added –

none


– heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down –of paint in hoses at low air temperature

no thinner should be added approx. 0.43 mm (= 0.017 in) at 20°C (paint temperature) min. 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)

ROLLER: nylon suitable for 2 component epoxy with hair length 8 mm BRUSH: for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added




spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask and gloves should be used –during spraying ventilation should be provided in confi ned spaces to maintain good visibility –



measuring wet fi lm thickness a difference is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the –real applied wft, this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint fi lm for some time


Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY


BRUSH/ROLLER

Recommended thinner

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 1500




5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

SigmaCover 1500, SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 435 and polyurethanes

minimum interval



1 month


1 month

surface should be dry and free from any contamination – best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before –the fully cured stage is reached if this time is exceeded the surface has to be roughened –




5°C 48 hours 3 days 21 days10°C 24 hours 2 days 14 days20°C 12 hours 24 hours 7 days30°C 8 hours 16 hours 3 days40°C 6 hours 12 hours 2 days


/4

September 2009

SIGMACOVER 1500


20°C 60 min.30°C 30 min.









PDS 7715 231790 grey 5000001400 237619 grey 5000002200


REFERENCES

/4

25 November 20094 pages Revision of February 2009

two component aliphatic clear acrylic polyurethane gloss fi nish

– recoatable clear acrylic polyurethane fi nish suitable for application over aluminium pigmented polyurethanes – excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions – excellent gloss retention – non-chalking, non-yellowing – tough and abrasion resistant – resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, white spirit, paraffi ns, –aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals reduced sensitivity to early condensation and rain – can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure – cures at temperatures down to -5°C –

clear - gloss


1.0 g/cm³ 50 ± 2% max. 463 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 450 g/l (approx. 3.8 lb/gal) 35 - 50 µm depending on system 14.3 m²/l for 35 µm 1 hour min. 12 hours * max. unlimited 7 days *


at least 12 months

– previous coat; (polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if necessary during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5°C is –acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from water or ice substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT

/4

25 November 2009

SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT



none


Thinner 21-06 10 - 12%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%

Thinner 21-06



contains a toxic polyisocyanate curing agent – avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist –


Induction time

Pot life


BRUSH Recommended thinner Volume of thinner

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/4

25 November 2009

SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT



dft in µm 35 50

Overcoating table with itself


-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

48 hours

30 hours

16 hours

9 hours

6 hours

4 \hours

maximum interval

unlimited


Curing table

substrate temperature dry to handle full cure-5°C 48 hours 20 days0°C 24 hours 16 days10°C 12 hours 10 days20°C 6 hours 7 days30°C 5 hours 5 days40°C 3 hours 3 days





Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430

ADDITIONAL DATA


REFERENCES

/4

25 November 2009

SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT

Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434






PDS 7531 192494 clear 0000001400

/4


SIGMADUR 520 (SIGMADUR HB FINISH)

two component high build semigloss aliphatic acrylic polyurethane fi nish

– easy application by roller and airless spray unlimited recoatable – excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions – good colour and gloss retention (aluminium version becomes grey) – non-chalking, non-yellowing – cures at temperatures down to -5°C – tough and abrasion resistant – resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, paraffi ns, aliphatic –petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure –

full colour range and aluminium as RAL 9006 available - semigloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ (white)1.1 g/cm³ (aluminium) 58 ± 2% (white), 48 ± 2% (aluminium) max. 287 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (white)max. 377 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (RAL 9006) max. 383 g/l (approx. 3.2 lb/gal) (white)max. 405 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) (aluminium) 50 - 75 μm depending on system 11.6 m²/l for 50 μm, 7.7 m²/l for 75 μm * 1 hour min. 6 hours * max. unlimited 4 days *


at least 24 months base 26°C, hardener 42°C * see additional data

– previous coat; (epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if necessary during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5°C is –acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% – premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and –gloss change

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density

Volume solids VOC (supplied)

Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval

Full cure after

Shelf life (cool and dry place) Flash point


/4

March 2010




none




Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





theoretical spreading rate m²/l

colours 11.6 7.7

aluminium 9.6 6.4

dft in μm 50 75


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

March 2010


Overcoating table for SigmaDur products


-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

24 hours

16 hours

8 hours

6 hours

5 hours

3 hours

maximum interval

unlimited when cleaned from any contamination


Curing table


adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and –gloss change






REFERENCES

/4

March 2010







PDS 7524 119852 white 7000002200 183212 aluminium 9006262200

/3

December 20103 pages Revision of September 2005

SIGMADUR 540 (SIGMACOVER HS NISO FINISH)

two component high gloss VOC compliant epoxy acrylic fi nish

– non--isocyanate colour and gloss retention superior to standard epoxy coatings – non-chalking, non-yellowing – long pot life but quick drying –

wide colour range - highgloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 54 ± 2% max. 324 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 411 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 50 - 60 μm 10.9 m²/l for 50 μm * 2 hours 7 days


at least 12 months base 29°C, hardener 24°C * see additional data

– previous epoxy coats; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above –15°C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance – if required, thinner should be added after mixing the components –

none

6 hours at 20°C


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life


/3

December 2010



Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 91-92



avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist –



dft in μm 50 60

Overcoating table


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval


Curing table at 50 μm for SigmaDur 540





CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

December 2010











PDS 7740 204030 white 7000001400


REFERENCES

/4

December 20104 pages Revision of November 2006

SIGMADUR 550

two component aliphatic acrylic polyurethane fi nish

– unlimited recoatable excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions – excellent colour and gloss retention – non-chalking, non-yellowing – cures at temperatures down to -5°C – resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, paraffi ns, aliphatic –petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure – good application properties –

white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 55 ± 2% max. 334 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 430 g/l (approx. 3.6 lb/gal) 50 - 60 μm depending on system 11.0 m²/l for 50 μm * 1 hour min. 6 hours * max. unlimited 4 days *




DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/4

December 2010

SIGMADUR 550



none




Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53






dft in μm 50 60


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

December 2010

SIGMADUR 550



-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

24 hours

16 hours


maximum interval

unlimited


Curing table








REFERENCES

/4

December 2010

SIGMADUR 550






PDS 7537 238761 white 7000001400 238763 white 7000002200

/4


SIGMADUR 580 (SIGMADUR HS SEMIGLOSS)

two component high solids semigloss recoatable acrylic polyurethane fi nish

– excellent resistance against corrosion and sea water excellent colour and gloss retention – non-chalking, non-yellowing – cures at temperatures down to -5°C – tough and abrasion resistant – resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, paraffi ns, aliphatic –petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure – lead- and chromate free –

white (other colours on request) - semigloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 75 ± 2% max. 191 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 269 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal) 75 μm depending on system 10 m²/l for 75 μm * 2 hours min. 12 hours * max. unlimited 7 days *



– previous coat; (epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –




DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Pot life

/4

September 2010



Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%

Thinner 90-53






dft in μm 75 100 125



-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

60 hours

44 hours

24 hours

12 hours

8 hours

5 hours

maximum interval




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2010


Curing table

substrate temperature touch dry full cure-5°C 8 hours 22 days0°C 5 hours 18 days10°C 3 hours 10 days20°C 2 hours 7 days30°C 1 hour 4 days40°C 0.5 hour 3 days

adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) please note that should condensation occur during or soon after application –this may result in a reduction of gloss






REFERENCES

/4

September 2010







PDS 7530 180158 white 7000002200

/4

May 20114 pages Revision of March 2011

SIGMADUR 590

two component high solids aliphatic acrylic polyurethane fi nish

– excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions excellent colour and gloss retention – non-chalking, non-yellowing – resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, paraffi ns, aliphatic –petroleum products and mild chemicals good application properties –


(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 73 ± 2% max. 207 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 280 g/l (approx. 2.4 lb/gal) max. 185 g/l (approx 1.5 lbs/gal )UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3 100 - 125 μm depending on system 7.3 m²/l for 100 μm * 2.5 hours min. 8 hours * max. 7 days 4 days *




DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/4

May 2011

SIGMADUR 590



none

2.5 hours at 20°C * * see additional data



Thinner 60-15 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-58






dft in μm 100 125


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

May 2011

SIGMADUR 590



10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

7 days 7 days 12 hours


Curing table




10°C 4 hours20°C 2.5 hours30°C 1 hour




REFERENCES

/4

May 2011

SIGMADUR 590






PDS 7518

/4

May 20084 pages Revision of February 2006

two component high solids polymeric urethane

– excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions outstanding colour and gloss retention – non-chalking, non-yellowing – cures at temperatures down to -5°C – tough and abrasion resistant – resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, paraffi ns, aliphatic –petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure –



1.3 g/cm³ 68 ± 2% max. 226 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 289 g/l (approx. 2.4 lb/gal) 75 µm depending on system 9.1 m²/l for 75 µm 2 hours min. 12 hours * max. unlimited 7 days *



– previous coat; (epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –



none


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

SIGMADUR 1800

/4

May 2008

SIGMADUR 1800

Sigma thinner 21-06 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.42 mm (= 0.015 - 0.016 in) 18 MPa (= approx. 180 bar; 2560 p.s.i.)

Sigma thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

Sigma thinner 21-06 0 - 5%

Sigma thinner 90-53






dft in µm 75 100 125

Overcoating table for SigmaDur 1800


-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

3 days

2 days

1 day

12 hours

8 hours

5 hours

maximum interval





CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

May 2008

SIGMADUR 1800

Curing table

substrate temperature touch dry full cure-5°C 8 hours 22 days0°C 5 hours 18 days10°C 3 hours 10 days20°C 2 hours 7 days30°C 1 hour 4 days40°C 0.5 hour 3 days

adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) please note that should condensation occur during or soon after application –this may result in a reduction of gloss






REFERENCES

/4

May 2008

SIGMADUR 1800






PDS 7529 236077 white 7000001400 236081 white 7000002200

/3


SIGMAFAST 20

high build zinc phosphate primer based on modifi ed alkyd resin

– good anticorrosive properties under atmospheric conditions fast drying – fast handling – recoatable with most one and two component coatings – suitable for atmospheric exposure conditions – lead- and chromate free –

redbrown, grey (other (RAL) colours on request) - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) 1.5 g/cm³ 55 ± 2% max. 258 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 382 g/l (approx. 3.2 lb/gal) 50 - 75 μm per coat 11.0 m²/l for 50 μm, 7.3 m²/l for 75 μm 15 minutes min. 4 hours for 75 μm dft * at higher dft's drying time will be longer at least 12 months * see additional data

– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ steel; power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St2 – shop primed steel; sweep blasted or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Ss or –SPSS-Pt2 substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point

– stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15°C, otherwise –extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance – adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)

Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.48 mm (= 0.015 - 0.019 in) 12 - 16 MPa (= approx. 120 - 160 bar; 1700 - 2270 p.s.i.)

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS






/3

March 2010

SIGMAFAST 20

Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.35 MPa (= approx. 3.5 bar; 50 p.s.i.)

Thinner 20-05 0 - 2%

Thinner 21-06



Overcoating table for SigmaFast 20 for dft up to 75 μm

with alkyd based products(e.g. SigmaFast 20 and 40)


10°C 15°C 20°C

minimum interval

75 min. 60 min. 45 min.

maximum interval

unlimited unlimited unlimited



with two component products: SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 435, SigmaDur 520


10°C 15°C 20°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

unlimited unlimited unlimited




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

March 2010

SIGMAFAST 20








PDS 7155 178249 redbrown 2008002200 181056 grey 7035262200 179897 base L 0710002194 179898 base Z 0070002158


REFERENCES

/3

September 20093 pages Revision of June 2007

high build fi nish coating, based on modifi ed alkyd resin

– suitable for atmospheric exposure conditions fast drying – fast handling – good gloss and colour retention – not suitable for immersion in water –



1.3 g/cm³ 45 ± 2% max. 390 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 490 g/l (approx. 4.1 lb/gal) 50 µm per coat 9.0 m²/l for 50 µm 45 min. min. 4 hours for 50 µm dft max. unlimited at higher dft's drying time will be longer at least 24 months

– previous suitable coat; (e.g. SigmaFast 20) dry and free from any contamination old existing sound coating; suffi ciently roughened, dry and cleaned – substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






SIGMAFAST 40

/3

September 2009

SIGMAFAST 40


Thinner 20-05 0 - 2%

Thinner 21-06



Overcoating table for SigmaFast 40 for dft up to 50 µm


10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval







CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA


REFERENCES

/3

September 2009

SIGMAFAST 40






PDS 7234 235941 base L 0710002197 235942 base L 0710001492 235289 base Z 0070002179 235290 base Z 0070001448

/3


fast drying fi nish, based on modifi ed alkyd resin

– suitable for atmospheric exposure conditions good gloss and colour retention – fast drying – fast handling –

RAL colours - gloss


1.1 g/cm³ 44 ± 2% max. 468 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 506 g/l (approx. 4.2 lb/gal) 35 - 50 µm per coat 12.6 m²/l for 35 µm, 8.8 m²/l for 50 µm 1.5 hour min. 8 hours for 35 µm dft at higher dft's drying time will be longer at least 12 months

– previous suitable coat; (e.g. SigmaFast 20) dry and free from any contamination old existing sound coating; suffi ciently roughened, dry and cleaned – substrate temperature must be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew point –during application and curing


Thinner 21-06 approx. 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.33 - 0.38 mm (= 0.013 - 0.015 in) 12 - 16 MPa (= approx. 120 - 160 bar; 1700 - 2270 p.s.i.)

Thinner 21-06 25%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 1.4 - 2.0 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C







SIGMAFAST 45

/3

September 2009

SIGMAFAST 45


Thinner 21-06



Overcoating table for SigmaFast 45 for dft up to 50 µm


10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval






CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA


REFERENCES

/3

September 2009

SIGMAFAST 45






PDS 7236 165444 base L 0710002192 165794 base Z 0070002179

/4

March 20114 pages Revision of November 2010

SIGMAFAST 205

two component high build polyamide cured zinc phosphate epoxy primer/coating

– general purpose epoxy primer/coating for atmospheric conditions fast curing – recoatable with most two component epoxy- and polyurethane coatings – tough, with long term fl exibility – easy application by airless spray –

grey (other (RAL) colours on request) - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 70 ± 2% max. 224 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 322 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 80 - 150 μm depending on system 8.8 m²/l for 80 μm, 4.7 m²/l for 150 μm 2 hours min. 4 hours for 150 μm dft * max. 6 months * 4 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing



none above 10°C10 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10°C

6 hours at 20°C *

Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in)

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orifi ce

/4

March 2011

SIGMAFAST 205

15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)


Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 80 100 150


with SigmaFast 205, SigmaCover 435,SigmaCover 456 and various two component polyurethane coatings


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



Nozzle pressure



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

March 2011

SIGMAFAST 205

Curing table

substrate temperature dry to handle full cure5°C 18 hours 8 days10°C 12 hours 6 days20°C 6 hours 4 days30°C 4 hours 3 days40°C 3 hours 2 days







REFERENCES

/4

March 2011

SIGMAFAST 205






PDS 7802 225064 grey 5188052200

/4


SIGMAFAST 210

two component high build zinc phosphate polyurethane primer/fi nish

– fast curing specially designed for in-shop application – easy application by airless spray – unlimited recoatable – good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel – good resistance to atmospheric exposure – good colour retention – non-chalking, non-yellowing – cures at temperatures down to -5°C –

a wide range of colours available by PPG colornet tinting system - semigloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for white, for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 55 ± 2% max. 270 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 383 g/l (approx. 3.2 lb/gal) 80 - 120 μm depending on system 6.9 m²/l for 80 μm, 4.6 m²/l for 120 μm 1 hour min. 4 hours * max. unlimited 4 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm galvanised steel; dry and free from any contamination and roughened (e.g. –sandpapering, sweepblasting) during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5°C is –acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% – premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and –gloss change

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/4

March 2011

SIGMAFAST 210



none




Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 80 120


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

March 2011

SIGMAFAST 210


with itself and two component polyurethane fi nishes


-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

unlimited


Curing table

substrate temperature dry to handle full cure-5°C 24 hours 15 days0°C 16 hours 11 days10°C 4 hours 5 days20°C 3 hours 4 days30°C 2 hours 3 days

adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and –gloss change to increase the curing speed of SigmaFast 210 the use of SigmaFast 210 –accelerator is allowed to a maximum of 5% on volume (set) please note that by adding the SigmaFast 210 accelerator the potlife will be –reduced, see table below


20°C 5 hours (no SigmaFast 210 accelerator)

20°C 2 hours (2.5% - volume/set)20°C 1 hour (5.0% - volume/set)



/4

March 2011

SIGMAFAST 210







PDS 7541 240785 black 8000002200 240786 black 8000001400 240787 white 7000002200 240788 white 7000001400

REFERENCES

/4

September 20094 pages Revision of January 2008

two component high build polyamine cured vinyl epoxy primer

– epoxy primer or build coat in protective coating systems for steel structures in atmospheric exposure tough, with long term fl exibility – cures at temperatures down to -5°C – fast drying and handling –

grey, yellow - fl at


1.5 g/cm³ 60 ± 2% max. 235 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 345 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 80 - 180 µm depending on system 7.5 m²/l for 80 µm, 3.3 m²/l for 180 µm * 50 minutes min. 1 hour * max. 1 year *


at least 12 months <21°C * see additional data

– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5°C is –acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –



15 minutes at 20°C



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C





Induction time

Pot life


SIGMAFAST 213

/4

September 2009

SIGMAFAST 213

approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)


Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 80 100 180

Overcoating table for 80 µm dft


0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval

3 hours 1.5 hour 45 min. 25 min.

maximum interval






CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMAFAST 213

Overcoating table for 150 µm dft


0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval

4.5 hours 2.5 hours 1 hour 35 min.

maximum interval






REFERENCES

/4

September 2009

SIGMAFAST 213






PDS 7705 219313 yellow 3000002200 219315 grey 5000002200

/4

January 20114 pages Revision of April 2009

SIGMAFAST 302

two component silicate zinc epoxy primer

– good anticorrosive properties fast curing – fast handling – topcoats must be unsaponifi able – cures at temperatures down to -5°C – reduced risk of mudcracking – ACQPA approval 21251 –

bluegreen, grey - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.1 g/cm³ 63 ± 2% max. 204 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 419 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 50 - 80 μm depending on system 12.6 m²/l for 50 μm * 10 min. at 20°C min. 40 min. * max. 1 year *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm substrate temperature must be at least 3°C above dew point – during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5°C is –acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice



10 minutes

4 hours at 20°C

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C





Induction time

Pot life

/4

January 2011

SIGMAFAST 302


Thinner 21-06 15 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.6 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 43 - 85 p.s.i.)

Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 50 80


with SigmaFast 213, SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 410


0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval

45 min. 30 min. 25 min. 20 min.

maximum interval






CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

January 2011

SIGMAFAST 302



0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval

60 min. 50 min. 40 min. 35 min.

maximum interval


surface should be dry and free from any contamination – zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should –not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure –conditions before overcoating any visible surface contamination must be removed by –high pressure water cleaning, sandwashing, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning




REFERENCES

/4

January 2011

SIGMAFAST 302






PDS 7704 216759 bluegreen 1000002200 218818 bluegreen 1000002100 267560 grey 5000002200

/3

March 20113 pages Revision of October 2009

SIGMAFAST 370

two component high build epoxy primer/coating

– general purpose epoxy primer/coating for atmospheric conditions fast curing – recoatable with most two component epoxy- and polyurethane coatings – tough, with long term fl exibility – easy application by airless spray –

grey (other (RAL) colours on request) - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm³ 66 ± 2% max. 179 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 306 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 - 150 μm depending on system * 6.6 m²/l for 100 μm * 15 min. min. 2 hours for 100 μm dft * max. 6 months * 4 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing



none above 10°C10 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10°C

4 hours at 20°C *


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life


/3

March 2011

SIGMAFAST 370


Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-58





dft in μm 100 150


with SigmaFast 370, SigmaCover 435 and SigmaDur 550


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval

8 hours 4 hours 2 hours 1 hour

maximum interval








CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

March 2011

SIGMAFAST 370










PDS 7803


REFERENCES

/3

November 20043 pages Revision of January 2000

SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL

one component, modifi ed acrylic based, air drying industrial enamel

– fast drying good exterior durability – excellent gloss and colour retention – VOC compliant as a fi nish –

Wide range of colours, lead free: BS 4800, BS381C, RAL - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) 1.1 - 1.3 g/cm³ ( depending on colour) 53 ± 2% max. 420 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 25 - 40 μm ( can be achieved by a single coat application or using a "wet on wet" technique) 21.2 m²/l for 25 μm, 13.3 m²/l for 40 μm* 40 min. at 20°C see overcoating table * at least 12 months

– can be applied on most sound clean paint systems or onto clean bare metal which has been primed with a suitable primer application temperature range 5 - 30 °C – substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –

– stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15°C, otherwise –extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance – adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) addition of thinner may increase the VOC value of the product to greater –than 420 g/litre

no extra thinner should be required but if necessary Thinner 21-06 can be added to the mixed components 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.33 - 0.43 mm (= 0.015 - 0.017 in) 15 - 28 MPa (= approx. 2100 - 3900 p.s.i.)

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness

Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place)



AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner

Volume of thinner Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure

/3

November 2004

SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL

no extra thinner should be required but if necessary Thinner 21-06 can be added to the mixed components 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

no extra thinner is required but if necessary Thinner 21-06 can be added if desired to mixed components 0 - 5% if required



Overcoating table for SigmaFast HS Enamel for dft up to 25 μm


5°C 20°C 30°C

Overcoat up to 8 hours 5 hours 2 hours

Then after 30 hours 24 hours 16 hours

wrinkling of the topcoat may occur if overcoating takes place between the –times stated

Drying table

at substrate temperatures

touch dry tack free hard dry

5°C 75 min. 120 min. 24 hours20°C 40 min. 60 min. 24 hours30°C 30 min. 50 min. 12 hours


AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner

Volume of thinner Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure


Volume of thinner

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA


/3

November 2004

SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL







PDS 0672UK

REFERENCES

/4


SIGMAGUARD 260

two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy holding primer

– holding primer for SigmaGuard CSF 650, Novaguard 840 and Novaguard 890 can be applied and cures at temperatures down to +5°C – good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface – good abrasion resistance –

pink - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm³ 68 ± 2% max. 194 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 328 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 75 μm * 9.1 m²/l for 75 μm 2 - 3 hours at 20°C, 14 - 16 hours at 5°C min. 8 hours * max. 1 month * see curing table *



– steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2½ and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm – the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of –SigmaGuard 260 substrate temperature must be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew point –during application and curing

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/4

March 2011

SIGMAGUARD 260








Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 75 100



Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

March 2011

SIGMAGUARD 260

Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 260 for dft up to 75 μm

with SigmaGuard CSF 650, Novaguard 840 or Novaguard 890


5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval



2 months 2 months 2 months 1 month 1 month



substrate temperature dry to handle full cure5°C 20 hours 10 days10°C 10 hours 7 days20°C 3 hours 5 days40°C 1 hour 3 days

adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) when used as a primer under solvent free tank-linings the dft must be limited –to a maximum of 100 μm


5°C 8 hours10°C 6 hours15°C 4 hours20°C 2 hours40°C 30 min.



/4

March 2011

SIGMAGUARD 260







PDS 7944 241815 pink 6007002200

REFERENCES

/4

July 20114 pages Revision of February 2010

SIGMAGUARD 603


– one coat protection for maintenance or major refurbishment of ballast water tanks and crude oil tanks tolerant to marginal surface preparation – good corrosion resistance – can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard – good visibility due to light colour –

light grey - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 100% max. 111 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 144 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 μm 3.3 m²/l for 300 μm * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good –corrosion protection coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm) – previous epoxy coat; in sound condition, dry and free from any –contamination and suffi ciently roughened if necessary pitted steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ is recommended – suitable primer; SigmaCover 280 – substrate temperature must be above 5°C during application and curing – There are no restrictions regarding dew point temperature and relative –humidity. suitable for damp surfaces –

marine 1 x 300 μm SigmaGuard 603

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




/4

July 2011

SIGMAGUARD 603


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at –least 20°C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application – no thinner should be added –

none


– use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down –of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line –heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to –approx. 30°C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible –

no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) at 20°C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.)at 30°C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.)







Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/4

July 2011

SIGMAGUARD 603



dft in μm 300 400

max. dft when brushing: 150 - 200 μm



Overcoating with SigmaGuard 603 (spot repair and stripe coating)


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval





dry to handle minimum curing time before exposure to sea water

full cure

5°C 60 hours 10 days 15 days10°C 30 hours 5 days 7 days20°C 16 hours 4 days 5 days30°C 10 hours 2 days 3 days


ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

July 2011

SIGMAGUARD 603


20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.









PDS 7985 267450 lightgrey 5163052200


REFERENCES

/4

April 20094 pages Revision of January 2007

two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating

– tank coating with good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals short curing periods – good low temperature curing – easy to clean – Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 –

light green, grey - gloss


1.4 g/cm³ 78 ± 2% max. 163 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 233 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 125 µm * 6.2 m²/l for 125 µm * 7 - 8 hours at 5°C, 5 - 6 hours at 10°C, 2 - 3 hours at 20°C min. 8 hours * max. 28 days * see curing table *



– steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm previous coat; dry, free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if –necessary substrate temperature must be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew point –during application and curing

tankcoatings system sheet: 3320

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




SIGMAGUARD 720

/4

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 720





Thinner 91-92 up to 10% for a one coat application of 125 µm dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)

Thinner 91-92 5 - 15% for a one coat application of 125 µm dft 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

not recommended, only for spot repair and stripe coating

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 100 125



Induction time

Pot life



BRUSH

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 720

Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 720 for dft up to 125 µm


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




substrate temperature min. curing time of SigmaGuard 720 tankcoating system before transport ofaliphatic petroleum products and ballast water and tanktest with sea water

cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11

5°C 10 days 17 days10°C 7 days 14 days15°C 5 days 8 days20°C 3 days 5 days30°C 2.5 days 4 days40°C 1.5 day 3 days

minimum curing time of SigmaGuard 720 tankcoating system before –transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to –the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)


15°C 3 hours20°C 1.5 hour25°C 1 hour30°C 30 min.



/4

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 720







PDS 7433 179122 grey 5000002200 180730 green 4000002200

REFERENCES

/4


two component high solids polyamine cured phenolic epoxy coating

– tank coating with good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals short curing periods – good low temperature curing – easy to clean – can be used under insulation up to 150°C –

offwhite, cream - gloss


1.4 g/cm³ 78 ± 2% max. 169 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 242 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 150 µm * 5.2 m²/l for 150 µm * 3 hours at 20°C min. 8 hours * max. 28 days * see curing table *



– steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm previous coat; dry, free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if –necessary substrate temperature must be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew point –during application and curing





DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

SIGMAGUARD 730

/4

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 730

Thinner 91-92 up to 10% for a one coat application of 150 µm dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)

Thinner 91-92 5 - 15% for a one coat application of 150 µm dft 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

not recommended, only for spot repair and stripe coating

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 125 150


Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 730 for dft up to 150 µm


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval





BRUSH

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 730


substrate temperature min. curing time of SigmaGuard 730 tankcoating system before transport ofaliphatic petroleum products and ballast water and tanktest with sea water

cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11

5°C 10 days 17 days10°C 7 days 14 days20°C 3 days 5 days30°C 2.5 days 4 days40°C 1.5 day 3 days

minimum curing time of SigmaGuard 730 tankcoating system before –transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to –the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)


15°C 3 hours20°C 1.5 hour25°C 1 hour30°C 30 min.




REFERENCES

/4

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 730






PDS 7459 247818 offwhite 7001002200 247817 cream 3000002200

/6

April 20096 pages Revision of April 2007

two component moisture curing zinc rich (ethyl) silicate coating

– tankcoating with excellent solvent and chemical resistance to be used as tankcoating or as a system primer in various paint systems –based on unsaponifi able binders can withstand substrate temperatures from -90°C up to +400°C, under –normal atmospheric exposure conditions high zinc content resulting in excellent corrosion protection – good impact and abrasion resistance – certifi cate for ASTM A-490 class 'B' for slip co-effi cient – Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 – must not be used for immersion in alkaline (more than pH 9) or acidic (less –than pH 5.5) liquids

grey - fl at


2.7 g/cm³ 65 ± 2% max. 167 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 452 g/l (approx. 3.8 lb/gal)

– average dft 75 µm to 100 µm with a minimum of 75 µm on smooth non-pitted blast cleaned steelaverage dft 100 µm with a minimum of 75 µm on rough or light pitted, blast –cleaned steelheavy pitted steel substrate is not acceptable –

8.7 m²/l for 75 µm, 6.5 m²/l for 100 µm * 30 min. at 20°C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed 12 hours *


binder: at least 9 monthspigment: at least 24 months (store pigment moisture free) * see additional data

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C



Curing time


SIGMAGUARD 750

/6

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 750

– steel; blast cleaned in-situ to at least ISO-Sa2½, completely free from rust, scale, shop primer and contaminations, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm galvanised steel; sweep blasted to roughen the surface and to remove any –zinc salts which might be present a heavy pitted steel substrate is not acceptable – substrate temperatures ranging from -5°C up to +40°C during application are –acceptable substrate temperature must be at least 3°C above dew point during –application and curing relative humidity during curing should be above 50% –

marine system sheet: 3323

mixing ratio by volume: binder to zinc powder 74 : 26

Many of Sigma's zinc silicates are supplied as 2 pack materials consisting of a jerrycan with pigmented binder and a drum containing a bag of zinc powder.

To ensure proper mixing of both components the instructions given below must be followed. To avoid lumps in the paint do not add the binder to the zinc powder.

Take the bag with zinc powder out of the drum.1) Shake the binder in the jerrycan a few times to reach a certain degree of 2.) homogenisation. Pour about 2/3 of the binder in the empty drum.3.) With the jerrycan now reduced in weight and containing more free space, 4.) shake it vigorously to obtain a homogeneous mix with no deposits left on the bottom, and add this to the drum. Add the zinc powder gradually to the pigmented binder in the drum and at 5.) the same time continuously stir the mixture by using a mechanical mixer (keep the speed low). Stir the zinc dust powder thoroughly through the binder (high speed) and 6.) keep stirring till, a homogeneous mixture is obtained. Strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen.7.) Agitate continuously during application (low speed).8.) The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended.

Note: At application temperature above 30°C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary.

none





Induction time

Pot life

/6

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 750

Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.64 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 9 - 12 MPa (= approx. 90 - 120 bar; 1280 - 1700 p.s.i.) a dedicated pump for a zinc silicate coating with constant agitation must be used

Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.) a dedicated pump for a zinc silicate coating with constant agitation must be used

only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15%apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 µmsame for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft

Thinner 90-53

when for some reason the dft is below specifi cation and an extra coat of SigmaGuard 750 has to be applied, SigmaGuard 750 should be thinned down with 25 - 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time this is only valid for spray application



very highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry fi lms with void spaces in between the particles



dft in µm 75 100

above 150 µm dft mudcracking can occurmax. dft when brushing: 35 µm




CLEANING SOLVENT

UPGRADING DFT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/6

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 750

Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 750 for dft up to 75 µm(50% RH and higher)


-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

24 hours

24 hours

18 hours

12 hours

6 hours

4 hours

maximum interval

unlimited, provided the surface is dry and cleaned from contamination and zinc salts

a RH below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time – if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects –(pinholes) SigmaGuard 750 should be sealed with approved coatings SigmaGuard 750 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only –cures after suffi cient take up of water (from the atmosphere or immersion) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time before entering service or overcoating, a suffi cient degree of cure should be –obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times –are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by:

wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 • hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying•

before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaGuard 750 should always be visibly –dry and checked on suffi cient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is –a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed

/6

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 750

Curing table for dft up to 75 µm(50% RH and higher)

substrate temperature curing time for non immersion service

curing time for full resistance according to resistance list

0°C 24 hours 4 days10°C 18 hours 4 days20°C 12 hours 2 days30°C 6 hours 2 days40°C 4 hours 2 days

SigmaGuard 750 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only –cures after suffi cient take up of water (from the atmosphere or immersion) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time relative humidity during curing recommended to be above 50% – adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)




Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specifi cation for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491 Relative humidity - substrate temperature -air temperature see information sheet 1650


REFERENCES

/6

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD 750






PDS 7551 295032 grey 0000002135

/6


SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

two component solvent free amine cured modifi ed epoxy coating

– tankcoating for drinking water can be applied by single feed airless spray equipment – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard – good visibility in confi ned spaces due to light colour – approved for potable water by: National Institute of Public Health, Norway – for other approvals see sheet 1882 – Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 –

cream - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 100% max. 33 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 44 g/l (approx. 0.4 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 400 μm depending on system 3.3 m²/l for 300 μm * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 12 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280, SigmaGuard 215 (dft of • 50 μm) or SigmaPrime 200 (dft of 75 μm) should be used

concrete; blast cleaned to remove loose particles, laitance and –contamination

if a primer is required to withstand hydrostatic pressure, use SigmaShield • 1090 prior to application of SigmaGuard CSF 575

substrate temperature must be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/6

March 2010

SIGMAGUARD CSF 575



none










Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/6

March 2010

SIGMAGUARD CSF 575



dft in μm 300 400


measuring wet fi lm thickness a difference is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the –real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which –retards the release of air trapped in the paint fi lm for some time a practical recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specifi ed –dft plus 60 μm


Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 575 for dft up to 300 μm


10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

4 days 24 hours 16 hours 10 hours

maximum interval



ADDITIONAL DATA

/6

March 2010

SIGMAGUARD CSF 575


substrate temperature dry to handle full curefor drinking water

10°C * 4 days 20 days20°C 1 day 12 days30°C 16 hours 7 days40°C 10 hours 5 days

* for the fi rst 24 hours the maximum RH must be 50% or lower

adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for drinking water tanks SigmaGuard CSF 575 must not be applied at –temperatures below 10°C for drinking water tanks, a tankwash should be carried out after full cure and –before the tank goes into service for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working –procedure should be followed WASHING PROCEDURE – all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly –cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or high- –pressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as abovenote: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained – concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. –1 ltr/10 m² tanks should be fi lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the –water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly fl ushed out with tap water – depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water –samples, after fi lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be fi t to carry drinking water –

/6

March 2010

SIGMAGUARD CSF 575


20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.

due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may –increase DISCLAIMER – SigmaGuard CSF 575 is especially developed for the storage and transport –of drinking water and is approved for purpose in accordance with the requirements of the relevant certifi cate (See sheet 1882). In order to fulfi ll the requirements it is important that the coating is well –ventilated during application and curing and that the coating has received full curing. Furthermore the recommended washing procedure should be followed –before exposure to drinking water, in line with our latest datasheet and working procedure. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does not accept any responsibility or –liability for any odour, taste or contamination imparted to the drinking water from the coatings or products retained in the coating.




REFERENCES

/6

March 2010

SIGMAGUARD CSF 575






PDS 7475 179135 cream 3012002200

/6

May 20116 pages Revision of August 2009

SIGMAGUARD CSF 585


– tankcoating for drinking water can be applied by single feed airless spray equipment – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard – good visibility in confi ned spaces due to light colour – approved for drinking water by: KIWA Holland – for other approvals see sheet 1882 –

blue, white - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 100% max. 5 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 6 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 250 - 400 μm depending on system 3.3 m²/l for 300 μm * 5 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 12 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm substrate temperature must be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing if a holding primer is required SigmaGuard 215, SigmaCover 280 or –SigmaPrime 200 can be used for KIWA only SigmaGuard 215 is approved as a holding primer –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/6

May 2011

SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 77.5 : 22.5


allow induction time before use10°C - 15 min.

approx. 90 minutes at 20°C * * see additional data









Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/6

May 2011

SIGMAGUARD CSF 585



dft in μm 250 300 400


measuring wet fi lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the –real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which –retards the release of air trapped in the paint fi lm for some time a practical recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specifi ed –dft plus 60 μm


Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 585 for dft up to 300 μm(for spot repair and stripe coating only)


10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

4 days 24 hours 16 hours 10 hours

maximum interval



ADDITIONAL DATA

/6

May 2011

SIGMAGUARD CSF 585


substrate temperature dry to handle full curefor drinking water

10°C * 4 days 20 days20°C 1 day 12 days30°C 16 hours 7 days40°C 10 hours 5 days

* for the fi rst 24 hours the maximum RH must be 50% or lower

adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) SigmaGuard CSF 585 must not be applied at temperatures below 10°C – for drinking water tanks, a tankwash should be carried out after full cure and –before the tank goes into service for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working –procedure should be followed

WASHING PROCEDURE The recommended washing procedure must be applied after completion of the application. Suffi cient time for full-curing and ventilation must be allowed in accordance with the recommendations as stated in the latest Product Data Sheets and working procedure.

Always an adequate washing procedure should be followed. Several adequate washing procedures are available and may be used (see e.g. washing procedure described in relevant certifi cate).

Example of adequate washing procedures: after full curing of the system as per the latest PDS, the tank should be fi lled 1.– completely with fresh tap water the fresh tap water should remain in the tanks at least 4 full days – afterwards all tank compartments such as inner hull sides, bottom and deck- –heads etc. should be thoroughly washed using high pressure water after washing, the tanks should be thoroughly drained – after this procedure the tanks will be fi t to carry drinking water –

all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly 2.– cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or high- –pressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as abovenote: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained – concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. –1 ltr/10 m²

/6

May 2011

SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

tanks should be fi lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the –water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly fl ushed out with tap water – depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water –samples, after fi lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be fi t to carry drinking water –


20°C 90 min.30°C 60 min.


DISCLAIMER SigmaGuard CSF 585 is especially developed for the storage and transport –of drinking water and is approved for purpose in accordance with the requirements of the relevant certifi cate (See sheet 1882). In order to fulfi ll the requirements it is important that the coating is well –ventilated during application and curing and that the coating has received full curing. Furthermore the recommended washing procedure should be followed –before exposure to drinking water, in line with our latest datasheet and working procedure. After the washing procedure PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does not accept any responsibility or liability for any odour, taste or contamination imparted to the drinking water from the washing products retained in the coating.




REFERENCES

/6

May 2011

SIGMAGUARD CSF 585






PDS 7785 219191 blue 1000002200 219190 white 7000002200

/6



– tank coating for crude oil/ballast and aliphatic petroleum products also suitable as coating system for storage and transport of drinking water – good resistance to various chemicals – one coat protection for steel structures, ships and storage tanks with –excellent corrosion resistance can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard – good visibility due to light colour – also a conductive version is available, see sheet 7753 – can be reinforced with chopped glassfi bre or mat – clear version for glassmat reinforced solvent free tank bottom system (see –system sheet 4144) meets the requirements of Mil-C-4556E concerning resistance against –aircraft fuel and fuel degradation

green, offwhite, clear - gloss


1.3 g/cm³ 100% max. 109 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 143 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 600 µm depending on system 3.3 m²/l for 300 µm * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 µm suitable primer; SigmaGuard 260, SigmaCover 280, SigmaPrime series or –SigmaCover 522, depending on system requirements substrate temperature must be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew point –during application and curing

marine 1 x 300 µm SigmaGuard CSF 650 or suitable primer (min. dft of 50 µm) + 1 x 250 µm SigmaGuard CSF 650

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

/6

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD CSF 650


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above –20°C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application – no thinner should be added – for recommended application instructions: see working procedure –

none



no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) at 20°C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.)at 30°C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.)







Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/6

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD CSF 650



dft in µm 250 300 600

max. dft when brushing: 150 - 200 µm

measuring wet fi lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the –real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which –retards the release of air trapped in the paint fi lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specifi ed dft plus 60 –µm


Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 650 for dft up to 300 µm


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval





adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for drinking water tanks, a tankwash should be carried out after full cure and –before the tank goes into service

ADDITIONAL DATA

/6

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

when used as coating system for storage and transport of drinking water the –recommended working and washing procedure should be followed

WASHING PROCEDURE The recommended washing procedure must be applied after completion of the application. Suffi cient time for full-curing and ventilation must be allowed in accordance with the recommendations as stated in the latest Product Data Sheets and working procedure.

Always an adequate washing procedure should be followed. Several adequate washing procedures are available and may be used (see e.g. washing procedure described in relevant certifi cate).

Example of adequate washing procedures: after full curing of the system as per the latest PDS, the tank should be fi lled 1.– completely with fresh tap water the fresh tap water should remain in the tanks at least 4 full days – afterwards all tank compartments such as inner hull sides, bottom and deck- –heads etc. should be thoroughly washed using high pressure water after washing, the tanks should be thoroughly drained – after this procedure the tanks will be fi t to carry drinking water –

all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly 2.– cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or high- –pressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as abovenote: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained – concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. –1 ltr/10 m² tanks should be fi lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the –water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly fl ushed out with tap water – depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water –samples, after fi lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be fi t to carry drinking water –

/6

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD CSF 650


20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.40°C 25 min.


Disclaimer for storage and transport of drinking water: SigmaGuard CSF 650 is approved for purpose in accordance with the –requirements of the relevant certifi cate (see sheet 1882) PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does not accept any responsibility or –liability for any odour, taste or contamination imparted to the drinking water from the coatings or products retained in the coating.




REFERENCES

/6

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD CSF 650






PDS 7443 179131 green 4000002200 179511 clear 0000002200

/4

April 20094 pages Revision of February 2006


– solvent free coating for the protection of steel storage tanks against petroleum products can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard – good conductive properties (<1x10 – 8 Ohm)

dark grey - gloss


1.4 g/cm³ 100% max. 98 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 133 g/l (approx. 1.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 400 µm depending on system 3.3 m²/l for 300 µm * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ blasting profi le 50 - 100 µm – substrate temperature must be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew point –during application and curing



none


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

SIGMAGUARD CSF 660

/4

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD CSF 660


no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 - 0.58 mm (= 0.021 - 0.023 in) at 20°C (paint temperature) min. 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.)








dft in µm 300 400


AIRLESS SPRAY



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD CSF 660


Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 660 for dft up to 300 µm(for spot repair and stripe coating only)


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval







20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.




/4

April 2009

SIGMAGUARD CSF 660







PDS 7753 220926 darkgrey 5004002200

REFERENCES

/4


two component high build amine adduct cured phenolic epoxy in situ lining

– provides excellent protection in severe chemical and high temperature service excellent resistance to blistering from the "cold wall effect" – excellent for use in sweet and sour crude, brine and processed petroleum –products resistant to produced water containing hydrogen sulfi de and carbon dioxide –

light green - fl at


1.7 g/cm³ 70 ± 2% max. 155 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 264 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal) 50 - 100 µm depending on system 14 m²/l for 50 µm * min. 12 hours * max. 5 days * 10 days *



– steel; chemically cleaned according to sheet 1493 or/and sand jetted, dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point

mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 90 : 10(do not vary proportions)

base and hardener should preferably be stored at a temperature of 15 - –20°C power agitate base component to uniform consistency before adding –hardener, then again after adding hardener add the hardener gradually to the base, using a mechanical mixer – no thinners should be added when used as an in situ coating – after mixing, commencement of the in situ application must be within 3 hours –

15 minutes


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

SIGMALINE 445

/4

April 2009

SIGMALINE 445

– application of this coating to internal pipe surfaces is accomplished by the use of pigs, pupjoints, compressors and other specialized equipment this application should be referred to contractors specializing and –experienced in this type of work coating performance is dependent upon proper surface preparation, –application and curing; these factors are not under the control of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings and therefore no warranty can be offered after the application of each coat, dry air has to be blown through the –coated pipe until the next coat is applied (see table for minimum overcoating intervals) this will remove the solvents and accelerate the curing – after the last coat is applied, fresh air blowing has to continue for a minimum –of 24 hours depending on line length, it may be necessary to switch the direction of the –fresh air

Recommended thinner Thinner 91-92 Ventilation compressed air to be introduced into the line to remove all solvents during and after coating or drying procedures

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 50 75 100

IN SITU APPLICATION

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

April 2009

SIGMALINE 445

Overcoating table for SigmaLine 445 for dft up to 75 µm


10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

7 days 5 days 3 days 1 day

after the application of each coat, warm dry air can be applied after suffi cient –ambient curing to accelerate the curing it is benefi cial to post cure the total coating system to increase the chemical –resistance


substrate temperature curing time after fi nal coat10°C 24 days15°C 26 days20°C 10 days25°C 7 days30°C 5 days35°C 3 days40°C 2 days






/4

April 2009

SIGMALINE 445

Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Internal chemical cleaning of steel pipes -in-situ application see information sheet 1493






PDS 7618 lightgreen

REFERENCES

/4

November 20104 pages Revision of April 2009

SIGMALINE 855

two component solvent free polyurethane coating

– solvent free coating for the protection of external of pipelines and underground storage tanks certifi ed to GBE/CW6 Part 1, meets EN10290 – excellent corrosion resistance – fast curing – good abrasion and impact resistance – excellent adhesion – good water resistance –

blue, grey, redbrown - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm³ 100% max. 1 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 2 g/l (approx. 0.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 1500 μm in one coat 0.7 m²/l for 1500 μm * 30 minutes 4 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm substrate temperature should be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point, lower temperatures will reduce fl ow properties for atmospheric exposure a top coat of SigmaDur 520 is recommended –


application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment – no thinner should be added –

none

1 minute at 60°C * * see additional data

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C





Induction time

Pot life

/4

November 2010

SIGMALINE 855

– twin feed hot airless spray pumping viscosity is achieved at 50°C - 70°C – temperature in the mixing unit must be between 65°C and 75°C –

no thinner should be added approx. 0.58 - 0.81 mm (= 0.023 - 0.032 in) depending on required production speed and dft 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Temperature at nozzle 60°C

Thinner 91-88 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: – mixed material will become insoluble within a few minutes after mixing at –60°C parts of the spraying equipment containing mixed base and hardener must –be cleaned immediately after completion of the job or during any interruption



ventilation should be provided in confi ned spaces to maintain good visibility –



dft in μm 1500

min. dft for closed fi lm with airless spray: 250 μm

Overcoating

for a good intercoat adhesion it is necessary that a coated surface which –should be repaired or completely recoated is roughened up by means of sweep blasting or abrading for manual repaint of small damages special repair sets are available called: –"SigmaLine 855 repair", product data sheet 7655 RP

AIRLESS SPRAY

Recommended thinner Nozzle orifi ce

Nozzle pressure

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

November 2010

SIGMALINE 855




0°C 3.5 hours 7 hours 12 days5°C 2 hours 4 hours 10 days10°C 1.5 hour 3 hours 8 days15°C 1 hour 1.5 hour 6 days20°C 30 min. 1 hour 4 days30°C 15 min. 30 min. 2 days40°C 6 min. 15 min. 24 hours50°C 3 min. 6 min. 12 hours



20°C 5 min.50°C 2 min.60°C 1 min.70°C 0.5 min.


SigmaLine 855 repair see product data sheet 7655 RP Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490


REFERENCES

/4

November 2010

SIGMALINE 855






PDS 7655 184960 blue 100000 (set 1000 ltr) 235683 redbrown 200800 (set 1000 ltr) 235693 grey 500000 (set 1000 ltr)

/4

January 20114 pages Revision of November 2005

SIGMALINE 859 (SIGMALINING PURTAR SF 59)

two component solvent free polyurethane tar coating

– solvent free coating for the protection of external of pipelines and underground storage tanks excellent corrosion resistance – fast curing – excellent adhesion – good abrasion resistance – good water resistance –

black - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.8 g/cm³ 100% max. 1 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 2 g/l (approx. 0.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 1500 μm in one coat 0.7 m²/l for 1500 μm * 1 hour * 4 days *


at least 6 months base and hardener above 65°C * see additional data

– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm substrate temperature should be above 15°C and at least 3°C above dew –point, lower temperatures will reduce fl ow properties


application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment – no thinner should be added –

none

1 minute at 60°C * * see additional data

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C





Induction time

Pot life

/4

January 2011



no thinner should be added approx. 0.58 - 0.81 mm (= 0.023 - 0.032 in) depending on required production speed and dft 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Temperature at nozzle 60°C

Thinner 91-88 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: – mixed material will become insoluble within a few minutes after mixing at –60°C parts of the spraying equipment containing mixed base and hardener must –be cleaned immediately after completion of the job or during any interruption



ventilation should be provided in confi ned spaces to maintain good visibility – if any symptoms arise immediately seek medical advice –



dft in μm 1500

min. dft for closed fi lm with airless spray: 250 μm

Overcoating

for a good intercoat adhesion it is necessary that a coated surface which –should be repaired or completely recoated is roughened up by means of sweep blasting or abrading for manual repaint of small damages special repair sets are available called: –"SigmaLine 859 repair", product data sheet 7659 RP

AIRLESS SPRAY


Nozzle pressure

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

January 2011


Curing table



15°C 1 hour 2 hours 6 days20°C 30 min. 1 hour 4 days30°C 15 min. 30 min. 2 days40°C 6 min. 15 min. 24 hours50°C 3 min. 6 min. 12 hours



20°C 5 min.50°C 2 min.60°C 1 min.70°C 0.5 min.




REFERENCES

/4

January 2011







PDS 7659 155313 black 180 ltr base 155314 transparent 200 ltr hardener

/4

April 20104 pages Revision of April 2009

SIGMALINE 2000

two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating

– one coat system direct to metal for pipe externals suitable for e.g. bell holing jobs – resistant to well designed cathodic protection – glossy and smooth appearance – can be applied by heavy duty twin feed hot airless spray equipment – can be applied at a substrate temperature of 90°C – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard – approved to Saudi Aramco APCS 113A –

redbrown - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 100% max. 108 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 146 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 600 - 1500 μm depending on system 1.7 m²/l for 600 μm * 6 hours min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 5 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing



none


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

/4

April 2010

SIGMALINE 2000

– heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minimum of 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down –of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible –









dft in μm 600 1000 1500




AIRLESS SPRAY



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

April 2010

SIGMALINE 2000

Overcoating table for SigmaLine 2000 for dft up to 600 μm(for spot repair and stripe coating only)


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

3 months 3 months 2 months 1 month






20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.40°C 20 min. *

* it is recommended to use plural airless equipment due to the short pot life





REFERENCES

/4

April 2010

SIGMALINE 2000






PDS 7497 189997 redbrown 2008002200

/4

April 20094 pages Revision of February 2006

two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating

– one coat system direct to metal for pipe externals excellent resistance to cathodic protection – glossy and smooth appearance – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard – fast curing especially when applied to preheated substrates – can be applied to rotating pipes at a dry fi lm thickness (dft) up to 600 µm at a –substrate temperature up to 90°C approved to Saudi Aramco APCS 113 –

dark brown - gloss


1.5 g/cm³ 100% max. 83 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 125 g/l (approx. 1.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 600 µm depending on system 1.7 m²/l for 600 µm * 30 min. at 60°C min. equal to dry to handle time (see curing table) max. 2 days (external exposure) or 1 month (in-shop exposure) 3 hours at 60°C4 - 6 min. at 50°C



– steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 µm substrate temperature should be above 15°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing the recommended substrate temperature should be preferably between –40°C and 60°C these recommended substrate temperatures ensure good curing and –appearance


application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment –

none

5 minutes at 50°C * * see additional data

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after Gellation time




Induction time

Pot life

SIGMALINE 2500

/4

April 2009

SIGMALINE 2500


no thinner should be added approx. 0.48 - 0.78 mm (= 0.019 - 0.031 in) depending on required production speed and dft at 40°C (paint temperature) min. 19 MPa (= approx. 190 bar; 2700 p.s.i.)at 60°C (paint temperature) min. 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)

for touch up and spot repair only no thinner should be added

Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53

Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use – paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time –has been expired






dft in µm 600



AIRLESS SPRAY


Nozzle pressure


CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

April 2009

SIGMALINE 2500

Overcoating table for SigmaLine 2500 for dft up to 600 µm(for spot repair and stripe coating only)


20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour

maximum interval *

1 month 1 month 1 month

* when exposed to sunlight maximum interval is 2 days for all mentioned temperatures



substrate temperature dry to handle full cure20°C 3 hours 2 days30°C 90 min. 1 day40°C 60 min. 12 hours50°C 40 min. 6 hours60°C 30 min. 3 hours70°C 20 min. 2 hours90°C 10 min. 1 hour



20°C 20 min.50°C 5 min.60°C 4 min.70°C 3 min.

for touch up due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing –may increase



/4

April 2009

SIGMALINE 2500







PDS 7667 195814 dark brown 2058002200

REFERENCES

/5

November 20105 pages Revision of May 2009

SIGMAPRIME 200 SERIES

two component multi purpose polyamide cured anticorrosive epoxy system

– universal epoxy priming system suitable for all vessel areas excellent anticorrosive properties and water resistance – surface tolerant, pure epoxy primer with good abrasion and chemical –resistance excellent adhesion to steel, shop primer, galvanised steel and non ferrous –metals excellent recoatability – suitable for application and curing in a wide range of climatic conditions – suitable for bulk supply and twin feed application – suitable on wet blast cleaned substrates (damp or dry) –

grey, yellow/green (redbrown for SigmaPrime 200 K) - eggshell


SigmaPrime 200: SigmaPrime 200 K:1.3 g/cm³ 1.4 g/cm³ 57 ± 2% 60 ± 2% max. 326 g/kg max. 287 g/kg(Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 430 g/l (approx. 3.6 lb/gal) max. 392 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) 75 - 200 μm depending on system 100 - 200 μm depending on system 7.6 m²/l for 75 μm, 6 m²/l for 100 μm,2.9 m²/l for 200 μm * 3 m²/l for 200 μm * 1.5 hour min. see tables * max. see tables * 7 days *



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density

Volume solids VOC (supplied)

Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate

Touch dry after Overcoating interval

Curing time


/5

November 2010


– for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned • (dry or wet) to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of • damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2 L (blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm)•

IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: – steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded • radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to • ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of • damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm

for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements – for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 –removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm



previous coat; (e.g. SigmaPrime 200) dry and free from any contamination – substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –

marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 2), 3107, 3108



none





Induction time

Pot life

/5

November 2010




no extra thinner needed but up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired

Thinner 90-53




theoretical spreading rate m²/l

SigmaPrime 200 7.6 4.6 3.6 2.9

SigmaPrime 200 K 6.0 4.8 3.8 3.0

dft in μm 75 100 125 160 200

max. dft:Dry Film Thickness of 2000 μm may occur occasionally (minor areas) where multiple overlapping is unavoidable (i.e. around scallops, corners, erection joint lines etc.). PPG must be consulted in case of DFT readings fall outside this recommendation.




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

November 2010


Overcoating table for SigmaPrime 200 or 200 K for dft up to 160 μm


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C


minimum interval

13 hours 6 hours 2.5 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour









5°C 5 hours 14 hours 21 days10°C 3 hours 8 hours 14 days20°C 1.5 hour 4 hours 7 days30°C 45 min. 2.5 hours 5 days40°C 30 min. 1.5 hour 4 days






/5

November 2010








PDS 7416 202391 SigmaPrime 200 yellow/green 4009002200 (202390 base, 202389 hardener) 211291 SigmaPrime 200 grey 9515052200 (211282 base, 202389 hardener) 244820 SigmaPrime 200 K grey 9515052150 (243529 base, 240992 hardener) 244832 SigmaPrime 200 K redbrown 2008002150 (243540 base, 240992 hardener)

REFERENCES

/5

April 20115 pages Revision of December 2010

SIGMAPRIME 700

two component multi purpose polyamide cured anticorrosive epoxy system

– general purpose epoxy primer/coating in protective coating systems for steel and non ferrous metals good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel – good adhesion to non ferrous metals – good fl ow and wetting properties – good water and corrosion resistance – cures at temperatures down to +5°C – suitable for touching up of weld seams and damages of epoxy coatings –during construction excellent recoatability – can be overcoated with most alkyd-, chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, epoxy- and –two component polyurethane coatings compatible with well designed cathodic protection systems – suitable on wet blast cleaned substrates (damp or dry) –

grey, redbrown, yellow/green, green - eggshell

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 70 ± 2% max. 227 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 313 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 - 200 μm depending on system * 7.0 m²/l for 100 μm, 3.5 m²/l for 200 μm 2 hours * min. see tables * max. see tables * 7 days *



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after


/5

April 2011

SIGMAPRIME 700

– for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to • ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of • damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2 L (blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm)•

IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: – steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded • radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding or at least equivalent process before painting steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to • ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of • damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements•

for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 –removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting profi le 30 - 75 μm dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust –size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnifi cation (ISO 8502-3:1992)



marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 1), 3107, 3108



none





Induction time

Pot life

/5

April 2011

SIGMAPRIME 700




Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 100 125 160 200

max. dft:Dry Film Thickness of 2000 μm may occur occasionally (minor areas) where multiple overlapping is unavoidable (i.e. around scallops, corners, erection joint lines etc.). PPG must be consulted in case of DFT readings fall outside this recommendation.




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

April 2011

SIGMAPRIME 700

Overcoating table for SigmaPrime 700 for dft up to 160 μm



5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

15 hours 9 hours 4 hours 2.5 hours 1.5 hour









5°C 6 hours 18 hours 21 days10°C 4 hours 12 hours 14 days15°C 3 hours 9 hours 7 days20°C 2 hours 6 hours 5 days30°C 1 hour 3 hours 5 days






/5

April 2011

SIGMAPRIME 700







PDS 7930 245825 redbrown 2008002150 (245345 base, 245346 hardener) 245824 grey 9515052150 (245344 base, 245346 hardener) 321760 green 4000002150 (321758 base, 245346 hardener ) 267442 redbrown 2008002200 (267439 base, 267440 hardener) 267441 grey 5000002200 (267438 base, 267440 hardener) 269714 yellow/green 4009002200 (321758 base, 267440 hardener)

REFERENCES

/4

October 20094 pages Revision of May 2009

two component high solids polyamine adduct cured pure epoxy coating

– universal epoxy system suitable for all vessel areas excellent anticorrosive properties and water resistance – good abrasion and chemical resistance – excellent crack resistance – suitable for use on a wide range of substrates – suitable for application and curing in a wide range of climatic conditions – user friendly fi tting shipyard block stage practices – suitable for bulk supply and twin feed application –

grey, green - gloss


1.3 g/cm³ 80 ± 2% max. 181 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 257 g/l (approx. 2.1 lb/gal) 100 - 250 µm depending on system * 8.0 m²/l for 100 µm, 3.2 m²/l for 250 µm 6 hours min. 5 hours * max. 14 days *



– for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to • ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 µm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of • damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 µm or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3

IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: – steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded • radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to • ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 µm steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of • damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 µm

for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C




SIGMAPRIME 800

/4

October 2009

SIGMAPRIME 800

for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 –removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting profi le 30 - 75 µm


for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 µm or • according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3• galvanised steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contamination and • roughened up


marine system sheet: 3106 (spec. 3)


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above –10°C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance – thinner should be added after mixing the components – see also attached application instructions –




Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53



Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

/4

October 2009

SIGMAPRIME 800





dft in µm 100 160 250

max. dft:Dry Film Thickness of 2000 µm may occur occasionally (minor areas) where multiple overlapping is unavoidable (i.e. around scallops, corners, erection joint lines etc.). PPG must be consulted in case of DFT readings fall outside this recommendation.

Overcoating table for SigmaPrime 800 for dft up to 160 µm


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval

14 hours 11 hours 5 hours 2.5 hours

maximum interval






5°C 20 hours 30 hours 25 days10°C 14 hours 20 hours 15 days20°C 6 hours 9 hours 7 days30°C 4 hours 5 hours 4 days40°C 2 hours 3 hours 2 days


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009

SIGMAPRIME 800










PDS 7938 271141 green 4009002150 (271140 base, 271152 hardener) 271143 green 4009002700 (271142 base, 271153 hardener) 272740 grey 9515052150 (272736 base, 271152 hardener) 272741 grey 9515052700 (272737 base, 271153 hardener)


REFERENCES

/3

July 20093 pages Revision of May 2008

modifi ed zinc phosphate alkyd primer

– economic general purpose maintenance and newbuilding primer suitable for use on superstructures and on steel surfaces not normally –exposed to water immersion the adhesion of subsequent coats is not affected by long weathering periods –of the primer should not be used over zinc primers, except when exposed to dry interior –conditions to be recoated with conventional paint systems – a thickness of 75 µm can be obtained by spray application in one operation –by means of the crosscoat technique certifi cate for low fl ame spread: see sheet 1883 –

yellow, brown (offwhite only on request) - fl at


1.4 g/cm³ 56 ± 2% max. 245 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 343 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 35 - 75 µm per coat 16 m²/l for 35 µm; 7.5 m²/l for 75 µm 3 hours at 5°C, 2 hours at 20°C min. 48 hours at 5°C, 24 hours at 20°C max. unlimited at least 12 months

– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm steel; power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St2 – shop primed steel; sweep blasted or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Ss or –SPSS-Pt2 previous coat; dry and free from any contamination – substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point but not above –50°C

marine system sheets: 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3107


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






SIGMARINE 24

/3

July 2009

SIGMARINE 24


Thinner 20-05 0 - 2%

Thinner 20-05







CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3

July 2009

SIGMARINE 24






PDS 7135 136774 brown 2000002200 136775 yellow 3000002200

/2

June 20092 pages Revision of September 2005

micaceous iron oxide (mio) alkyd topcoat

– excellent resistance to atmospheric industrial exposure conditions high UV resistance – mio effect –

according to the Micaceous Iron Oxide Colour card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings - fl at


1.5 g/cm³ 51 ± 2% max. 254 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 391 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) 50 - 75 µm 10.2 m²/l for 50 µm, 6.8 m²/l for 75 µm 1 hour min. 16 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months

– suitable primer; (e.g. Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently –roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point but not above –50°C


Thinner 20-05 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1700 - 2130 p.s.i.)


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C







SIGMARINE 35

/2

June 2009

SIGMARINE 35

Thinner 20-05 0 - 2%

Thinner 20-05










PDS 7244 various SAP codes


CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3

July 20093 pages Revision of April 2007

alkyd undercoating

– suitable in alkyd paint systems recoatable with various one component products – especially formulated for maintenance work by brush or roller – good adhesion to anticorrosive primers and old paint systems – easy application by brush with excellent fl ow, giving a smooth eggshell –appearance good drying properties even at low temperatures –

white (other colours on request) - eggshell


1.2 g/cm³ 45 ± 2% max. 339 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 412 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 35 µm 12.9 m²/l for 35 µm 6 hours at 10°C, 2 hours at 20°C min. 24 hours at 10°C, 16 hours at 20°C max. unlimited at least 12 months

– suitable primer; (e.g. Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently –roughened if necessary not suitable for zinc primed steel – substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point but not above –50°C




DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C







SIGMARINE 40

/3

July 2009

SIGMARINE 40

Thinner 20-05 15 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.35 MPa (= approx. 3.5 bar; 50 p.s.i.)

Thinner 20-05 0 - 2%

Thinner 20-05







CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3

July 2009

SIGMARINE 40






PDS 7213 136707 white 7000002200

/2

July 20092 pages Revision of September 2005

semi gloss fi nish based on alkyd resin

– for interior and exterior use good weather resistance – high opacity – good colour retention – can be applied over most intact alkyd paints – easy application by brush with excellent fl ow –

white (other (RAL) colours on request) - semigloss


1.2 g/cm³ 56 ± 2% max. 248 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 303 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 35 µm 16 m²/l for 35 µm 6 hours min. 18 hours max. unlimited at least 24 months

– previous suitable coat; (e.g. Sigmarine 40) dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point but not above –50°C



Thinner 20-05 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 mm 0.2 - 0.3 MPa (= approx. 2 - 3 bar; 28 - 43 p.s.i.)

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C







SIGMARINE 41

/2

July 2009

SIGMARINE 41

Thinner 20-05 0 - 5%

Thinner 20-05










PDS 7256 103393 white 7000002200


CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3


general purpose gloss paint based on a modifi ed alkyd resin

– particularly suitable as a fi nish for boottop, topside, deck and deckequipment a quick drying, hard, tough, water- and weather resistant coating with –moderate gloss retention can be applied over most intact alkyd paints – this coating is particularly suitable for areas intermittently exposed to water- –immersion and atmospheric conditions also available with non-skid material (supplied separately) for use on deck –surfaces certifi cate for low fl ame spread: see sheet 1883 –



1.2 g/cm³ 45 - 49 ± 2% (colours) - 48 ± 2% (white) max. 345 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 402 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 35 µm per coat 12.8 - 14.0 m²/l (colours) - 13.7 m²/l (white) for 35 µm 1 hour at 20°C, 3 hours at 5°C min. 16 hours at 20°C, 24 hours at 5°C max. unlimited at least 24 months

– previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point but not above –50°C

systems for boottop and topside system sheet: 3102 systems for superstructure and deck fi tting system sheet: 3104


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






SIGMARINE 48

/3

July 2009

SIGMARINE 48


Thinner 20-05 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

Thinner 20-05 0 - 2%

Thinner 20-05








CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3

July 2009

SIGMARINE 48






PDS 7238 136828 white 7000002200

/3


high gloss alkyd fi nishing coat

– suitable for interior and exterior use easy application by brush with excellent fl ow – good weather resistance – high opacity – good colour retention – gas proof: no discolouration with sulphur dioxide – not suitable for immersion in water or continuous splash of water – can be applied over most intact alkyd paints – certifi cate for low fl ame spread: see sheet 1883 –

white (other colours on request) - gloss


0.9 - 1.2 g/cm³ (colours) - 1.1 g/cm³ (white) 50 - 55 ± 2% (colours) - 50 ± 2% (white) max. 360 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (white) max. 407 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) (white) 35 µm per coat 14.3 - 15.7 m²/l (colours) - 14.3 m²/l (white) for 35 µm 3 hours min. 16 hours max. unlimited at least 24 months

– previous suitable coat; (e.g. Sigmarine 40, Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination and suffi ciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point but not above –50°C




DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C







SIGMARINE 49

/3

July 2009

SIGMARINE 49


Thinner 20-05 0 - 3%

Thinner 20-05







CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3

July 2009

SIGMARINE 49






PDS 7240 136845 white 7000002200

/4

October 20094 pages Revision of January 2008

SIGMASHIELD 220

two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy primer

– general purpose primer for coating systems for steel good abrasion resistance – outstanding sea water resistance – excellent corrosion resistance – good resistance against chemically polluted water – resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection –

yellow/green - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm³ 78 ± 2% max. 176 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 262 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal) 125 μm 6.2 m²/l for 125 μm * 4 hours min. 3.5 hours * max. 14 days * 5 days *



– for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to• SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm• steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L• steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2•

maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% – substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 220



none





Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 100 125



Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 220

Overcoating table for SigmaShield 220 for dft up to 150 μm


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

with epoxy coatings minimum interval

14 hours 7 hours 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour



maximum interval





dry to handle full curefor immersion in sea water

full cure *

5°C 14 hours 10 days 17 days10°C 7 hours 7 days 14 days20°C 3.5 hours 5 days 7 days30°C 2 hours 4 days 5 days40°C 1.5 hour 3 days 3 days






/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 220







PDS 7922 192274 yellow/green 4009002200

REFERENCES

/4


two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy primer

– general purpose primer for coating systems for steel cures at temperatures down to -10°C – good abrasion resistance – outstanding sea water resistance – excellent corrosion resistance – good resistance against chemically polluted water – resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection –

yellow/green - gloss


1.5 g/cm³ 78 ± 2% max. 161 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 240 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 100 - 125 µm 7.8 m²/l for 100 µm, 6.2 m²/l for 125 µm * 4 hours min. 10 hours * max. 14 days * 7 days *



– for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to• SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2•

substrate temperature should be between -10°C up to 15°C during –application and curing and at least 3°C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10°C is –possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 10°C


Full cure after




SIGMASHIELD 220 LT

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 220 LT



none





Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 100 125



Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 220 LT

Overcoating table for SigmaShield 220 LT for dft up to 150 µm


-10°C 0°C 5°C 10°C 15°C





maximum interval






full cure

-10°C 30 hours 18 days --0°C 15 hours 10 days 28 days5°C 12 hours 7 days 14 days10°C 6 hours 5 days 7 days15°C 4 hours 4 days 5 days



5°C 2 hours10°C 1 hour



/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 220 LT







PDS 7926 202660 yellow/green 4009002200

REFERENCES

/4

February 20114 pages Revision of October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 420


– coating for cargo tanks of bulk- or oil carriers and storage tanks build coat for underwater- and boottop systems – excellent abrasion and impact resistance – outstanding (sea)water resistance – easy to clean –

grey, redbrown (other colours on request) - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm³ 81 ± 2% max. 153 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 239 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 125 - 200 μm depending on system 5.4 m²/l for 150 μm, 4.1 m²/l for 200 μm * 3 hours min. 10 hours * max. 14 days * 5 days *



– previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 280 or SigmaShield 220) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing




none


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after





Induction time

Pot life

/4

February 2011

SIGMASHIELD 420

Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% for 200 μm dft,10% for 100 μm dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)


Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 100 150 175 200




5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C





maximum interval







CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

February 2011

SIGMASHIELD 420




full cure

5°C 15 hours 10 days 17 days10°C 8 hours 7 days 14 days20°C 3.5 hours 5 days 7 days30°C 2 hours 4 days 5 days40°C 1.5 hour 3 days 3 days

for cargo hold application: for full cure for hard angular cargoes, please –contact your nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales offi ce adequate ventilation to remove solvent must be maintained during –application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) should SigmaShield 420 or the total coating system (2 x 125 μm) be applied –in excess of the specifi ed dry fi lm thickness, then the time necessary to reach full cure will be increased


10°C 3 hours20°C 1.5 hour30°C 45 min.




REFERENCES

/4

February 2011

SIGMASHIELD 420






PDS 7951 190960 grey 5177052200 192367 redbrown 6179052200

/4


SIGMASHIELD 420 LT


– coating for cargo tanks of bulk- or oil carriers and storage tanks build coat for underwater- and boottop systems – cures at temperatures down to -10°C – excellent abrasion and impact resistance – outstanding (sea)water resistance – easy to clean –

grey, redbrown (other colours on request) - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm³ 81 ± 2% max. 123 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 191 g/l (approx. 1.6 lb/gal) 125 - 200 μm depending on system 5.4 m²/l for 150 μm, 4.1 m²/l for 200 μm * min. 10 hours * max. 14 days * 7 days *



– previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 280 (LT) or SigmaShield 220 (LT)) dry and free from ice and any contamination substrate temperature should be between -10°C up to 15°C during –application and curing and at least 3°C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10°C is –possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 10°C


Full cure after



/4

February 2011

SIGMASHIELD 420 LT




none


Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% for 200 μm dft,10% for 100 μm dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)


Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 100 150 175 200




Induction time

Pot life





CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

February 2011

SIGMASHIELD 420 LT

Overcoating table for SigmaShield 420 LT for dft up to 150 μm


-10°C 0°C 5°C 10°C 15°C





maximum interval






full cure

-10°C 34 hours 18 days --0°C 17 hours 10 days 28 days5°C 12 hours 7 days 14 days10°C 6 hours 5 days 7 days15°C 4 hours 4 days 5 days

for cargo hold application: for full cure for hard angular cargoes, please –contact your nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales offi ce adequate ventilation to remove solvent must be maintained during –application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) should SigmaShield 420 LT or the total coating system be applied in excess –of the specifi ed dry fi lm thickness, then the time necessary to reach full cure will be increased





/4

February 2011

SIGMASHIELD 420 LT







PDS 7955 202661 grey 5177052200 202662 grey 5163052200 202659 redbrown 6179052200

REFERENCES

/4

October 20094 pages Revision of November 2007

two component high solids glassfl ake reinforced polyamine adduct epoxy coating

– excellent abrasion and impact resistance suitable for use on ice-going vessels – excellent resistance to corrosion – long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear – resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals – very low water permeability, due to glassfl ake barrier –

black (other (light) colours on request) - gloss


1.5 g/cm³ 81 ± 2% max. 165 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 246 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 250 - 400 µm depending on system 3.2 m²/l for 250 µm, 2.0 m²/l for 400 µm * 3 hours min. 16 hours * max. 28 days * 5 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm suitable primer; (e.g. SigmaShield 220 (LT), SigmaCover 280 (LT)) dry and –free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




SIGMASHIELD 460

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 460


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above –15°C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure – very good mechanical mixing of base and hardener is essential – thinner should be added after mixing the components – fi lters should be removed from spray equipment –

none


Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% for dft of about 400 µm approx. 0.53 - 0.79 mm (= 0.021 - 0.031 in) 19 - 22.5 MPa (= approx. 190 - 225 bar; 2700 - 3200 p.s.i.)


– only for touch up and spot repair due to thixotropy it is diffi cult to obtain a smooth fi lm by brush although this –does not affect performance

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 250 400

maximum recommended dft for complex structures is 250 µm



Induction time

Pot life



BRUSH

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 460

Overcoating table for SigmaShield 460 for dft up to 400 µm


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval





touch dry dry to handle full curefor immersion in sea water

5°C 16 hours 30 hours 14 days10°C 8 hours 16 hours 10 days20°C 3 hours 8 hours 5 days30°C 2 hours 5 hours 4 days40°C 1 hour 3 hours 3 days



10°C 3 hours20°C 1.5 hour30°C 45 min.




REFERENCES

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 460






PDS 7952 191640 black 8000002200

/4

October 20094 pages Revision of December 2008

two component high solids glassfl ake reinforced polyamine adduct epoxy coating

– excellent abrasion and impact resistance cures at temperatures down to -10°C – long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear – excellent resistance to corrosion – suitable for use on ice-going vessels – very low water permeability, due to glassfl ake barrier – resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals –



1.5 g/cm³ 81 ± 2% max. 150 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 224 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 250 - 400 µm depending on system 3.2 m²/l for 250 µm, 2.0 m²/l for 400 µm * min. 16 hours * max. 14 days * 7 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µmsuitable primer; (e.g. SigmaShield 220 (LT), SigmaCover 280 (LT)) dry and –free from any contamination substrate temperature should be between -10°C up to 15°C during –application and curing and at least 3°C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10°C is –possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% –


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 10°C


Full cure after




SIGMASHIELD 460 LT

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 460 LT



none




– only for touch up and repair due to thixotropy it is diffi cult to obtain a smooth fi lm by brush although this –does not affect performance

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 250 400



Induction time

Pot life



BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 460 LT



-10°C 0°C 5°C 10°C 15°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




substrate temperature dry to handle full curefor immersion in sea water

-10°C 72 hours --0°C 36 hours 18 days5°C 28 hours 10 days10°C 16 hours 7 days15°C 12 hours 5 days







REFERENCES

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 460 LT






PDS 7972 220252 black 8000002200

/4


two component high solids glassfl ake reinforced polyamine cured epoxy coating

– excellent abrasion and impact resistance high glassfl ake level – excellent resistance to corrosion – long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear – very low water permeability, due to glassfl ake barrier – tar free – resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals – application and curing at temperatures down to 10°C – suitable for immersion service – compatible with cathodic protection systems – up to 750 µm in a single coat –



1.5 g/cm³ 91 ± 2% max. 103 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 154 g/l (approx. 1.3 lb/gal) 200 - 750 µm depending on system 4.6 m²/l for 200 µm * 6 hours * min. 24 hours * max. 3 months * 8 days



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 µm primed steel; (e.g. SigmaCover 280) dry and free from any contamination – substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



SIGMASHIELD 825(AMERLOCK 400 GFA)

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 825 (AMERLOCK 400 GFA)







Thinner 90-58





dft in µm 200 750


Pot life



BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009




10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C



with polyurethane durable fi nishes minimum interval


maximum interval





touch dry dry through full cure








REFERENCES

/4

October 2009







PDS 7745 242373 black 8000002200

/4

October 20094 pages

two component high solids glassfl ake reinforced polyamine cured epoxy coating

– low temperature curing down to 0°C excellent abrasion and impact resistance – high glassfl ake level – excellent resistance to corrosion – long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear – very low water permeability, due to glassfl ake barrier – tar free – resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals – suitable for immersion service – compatible with cathodic protection systems – up to 750 µm in a single coat –



1.5 g/cm³ 91 ± 2% max. 103 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 154 g/l (approx. 1.3 lb/gal) 200 - 750 µm depending on system 4.6 m²/l for 200 µm * min. 16 hours * max. 3 months * 16 days



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 µm primed steel; (e.g. SigmaCover 280) dry and free from any contamination – substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 10°C


Full cure after



SIGMASHIELD 825 LT(AMERLOCK 2 GFA)

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 825 LT (AMERLOCK 2 GFA)







Thinner 90-58





dft in µm 200 750


Pot life



BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009




10°C 20°C 30°C



with polyurethane durable fi nishes minimum interval


maximum interval

3 months 3 months 2 months



substrate temperature dry through full cure10°C 24 hours 16 days20°C 8 hours 8 days30°C 5 hours 5 days







REFERENCES

/4

October 2009







PDS 7749

/4

July 20114 pages Revision of June 2011

SIGMASHIELD 880

two component high build polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating

– primarily designed for use in offshore splashzone maintenance outstanding sea water resistance – excellent corrosion resistance – good abrasion resistance – continues to cure when immersed in water – long term protection in a single coat application – resistant to well designed cathodic protection – suitable on wet blast or ultra high pressure water (UHPWW) cleaned –substrates (damp or dry)

yellow, black (other colours on request) - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.45 g/cm³ 85 ± 2% max. 122 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 207 g/l (approx. 1.7 lb/gal) 200 - 1000 μm depending on system 4.3 m²/l for 200 μm * 3 hours * min. 3.5 hours * max. 14 days



– coating performance will depend upon the surface preparation degree blast cleaning –

steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2½• blasting profi le of 40 - 80 μm is recommended• hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L•

coated steel – existing sound adhering epoxy coating systems; suffi ciently roughened • and free from any contamination

substrate temperature should be at least 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C




/4

July 2011

SIGMASHIELD 880


do not thin more than is required by appropriate application property – too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure – thinner should be added after mixing the components –

none





Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 200 500


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

July 2011

SIGMASHIELD 880



5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C





with itself maximum interval


with various epoxy- and polyurethane coatings

maximum interval




substrate temperature touch dry dry to handle5°C 10 hours 28 hours10°C 5 hours 16 hours20°C 3 hours 8 hours30°C 2 hours 5 hours40°C 1 hour 3 hours

premature exposure to water will lead to whitening of dark colours when –applied between tides on jetties, piling etc. this will not affect anticorrosive properties of the coating adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)





/4

July 2011

SIGMASHIELD 880







PDS 7743 yellow 1018262200 black 8000002200

REFERENCES

/4

March 20114 pages Revision of October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 905

two component glassfl ake reinforced solvent free amine cured epoxy coating

– suitable for both marine and offshore use one coat protection for cargo holds with excellent corrosion resistance – excellent abrasion and impact resistance, especially to hard angular cargoes – good resistance to various chemicals – good visibility due to light colour – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard – can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) – ideal for immersed, non immersed and partially immersed such as splash –zones, decks etc.,

green - gloss

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 100% max. 107 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 141 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 400 - 500 μm 2.5 m²/l for 400 μm * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days *



– for cargo holds: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm•

for immersed areas: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm, dry and • free from any contamination coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting profi le 50 - 100 μm)•

substrate temperature must be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing

cargo holds system sheet: 3107

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




/4

March 2011

SIGMASHIELD 905



none










Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

/4

March 2011

SIGMASHIELD 905



dft in μm 400 500

max. dft when brushing: 150 - 200 μm

measuring wet fi lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the –real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which –retards the release of air trapped in the paint fi lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specifi ed dft –plus 60 μm

maximum dry fi lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days –(depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint fi lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed –in between the coating and the measuring device



10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



Curing table



ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

March 2011

SIGMASHIELD 905


20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.40°C 25 min.









PDS 7954 190476 green 4000002200


REFERENCES

/5


SIGMASHIELD 1090 (SigmaCover Armour Compund)

two component ultra high build fl int reinforced solvent free polyamine cured, epoxy compound

– seamless water impermeable layer with excellent anticorrosive properties suitable for the protection of steel and concrete – excellent resistance against impact and wear – excellent adhesion under dry and wet exposure conditions – resistant to water and splash of mild chemicals – can be exposed to water within 30 minutes after application – texture of surface is rough – suitable for decks exposed to heavy impact and abrasion –

white (other colours on request) - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.0 g/cm³ 100% max. 35 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 68 g/l (approx. 0.6 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 3 - 5 mm 0.2 m²/l for 5000 μm (= approx. 10 kg/m²)0.3 m²/l for 3000 μm (= approx. 6 kg/m²) 6 - 8 hours min. 4 days * max. 30 days * 7 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 75 - 100 μm concrete; free from laitance by blast cleaning – moisture content of concrete should be max. 4% – substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point

mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 90.4 : 9.6

do not prepare more material than can be used within 30 minutes – the temperature of base and hardener when mixing the components should –be approx. 20°C use always mechanical mixing equipment –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate


Curing time




/5

February 2010


add the hardener while stirring the base – mix thoroughly and quickly until a homogeneous material is obtained –

none

approx. 30 minutes at 20°C * * see additional data

A sprayable polymer mortar is a heavy material which has to be transported from the container with mixed material to the mortar spray gun or airless spray gun. Care should be taken that hoses are of suffi ciently large diameter, are as short as possible and that no obstructions are present; otherwise the binder will be pressed out of the mortar leaving dry (untransportable) material behind. So preferably 3/4 - 1 inch hoses should be used (for the airless spraying, just before the spraygun 5/8 inch).

equipment such as type 'Swinger Pump' Fizom A112 tech spray systems U.S.A.

approx. 5.6 mm, preferably with internal mix atomisation 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 57 - 85 p.s.i.)equipment such as Swinger Pump (11 : 1 ratio motor Air Tech spray equipment, Houston, TX) approx. 6.5 - 10 mm preferably with internal mix atomisation 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 57 - 85 p.s.i.)

– pressure vessel with bottom outlet and pressure lid vessel should not contain more than 25 litres – before use vessel and hoses have to be wetted with white spirit – hoses (diameter 25 mm = approx. 1 inch) not longer than 7 metres, –preferably in two lengths of 3.5 metres at low temperature hoses have to be insulated –

approx. 6.5 - 10 mm preferably with internal mix atomisation 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 57 - 85 p.s.i.)

equipment such as 'quick spray', carrousel pump and spraying equipment (Quickspray Inc., Port Clinton, Ohio, U.S.A.) approx. 4 - 5 mm 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 57 - 85 p.s.i.)

SigmaShield 1090 can be applied and compacted by trowels

Induction time

Pot life

APPLICATION

APPLICATION WITH LOW PRESSURE PUMP Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure


APPLICATION BY PRESSURE VESSEL


APPLICATION BY DISPLACEMENT FEED PUMP Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure

APPLICATION BY TROWELTOUCH UP

/5

February 2010


damaged areas should be reblasted and repaired with SigmaShield 1090 by –means of fi lling knives porosity, blow holes and crevices in concrete should be fi lled with –SigmaShield 1090 by hand (trowel/fi lling knife) larger areas can be resprayed with a beaker spray unit (e.g. Putzmeister) –suitable for spraying materials like coarse fi lled mortars

other application methods may be possible, please contact the nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales offi ce

Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use – insert a cellulose sponge into the hose inlet and force through with Thinner –90-53, repeat if necessary




Overcoating table for SigmaShield 1090 for dft up to 4 mm

with SigmaDur 520, SigmaDur 550 substrate temperature

5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

-- 7 days 4 days 1 day 1 day

maximum interval



Overcoating table for SigmaShield 1090 for dft up to 4 mm

with solventfree epoxies substrate temperature

10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

1 day or immediately wet on wet

maximum interval



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

February 2010


Curing table



10°C 10 - 12 hours 48 hours 12 days20°C 6 - 8 hours 24 hours 7 days30°C 4 - 6 hours 16 hours 4 days40°C 4 - 4 hours 12 hours 3 days



20°C 30 min.30°C 15 min.




REFERENCES

/5

February 2010







PDS 7490 140425 white 7001002120

/4


two component abrasion resistant solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating

– single coat system designed for under water hull of ice going and ice breaking vessels recognised by Lloyd's register as an abrasion resistant ice coating – excellent abrasion and impact resistance – resistant to well designed cathodic protection – low co-effi cient of friction – suitable for new construction or maintenance/repair – also suitable for tanks and other structures requiring abrasion resistance – excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90°C – excellent water resistance – good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents – can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard –

light grey, dark grey, brown (other colours on request) - gloss


1.5 g/cm³ 100% max. 97 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 143 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 400 - 500 µm 2.5 m²/l for 400 µm, 2 m²/l for 500 µm * 6 hours min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 5 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 µm substrate temperature should be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after

Shelf life (min. 10°C dry place)


SIGMASHIELD 1200

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 1200



none


heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minimum of 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20°C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.)at 30°C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.)








dft in µm 400 500


Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 1200



10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


with itself maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine

3 months 2 months 1 month

with itself, SigmaCover 525 and SigmaCover 456



with SigmaDur 550 maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine







20°C 60 min.30°C 45 min.




/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 1200







PDS 7744 195822 lightgrey 5177052200

REFERENCES

/4


two component abrasion resistant solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating

– single coat system designed for under water hull of ice going and ice breaking vessels recognised by Lloyd's register as an abrasion resistant ice coating – excellent abrasion and impact resistance – resistant to well designed cathodic protection – low co-effi cient of friction – suitable for new construction or maintenance/repair – also suitable for tanks and other structures requiring abrasion resistance – excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90°C – excellent water resistance – good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents – can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) – cures at temperatures down to +5°C – reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard –

black - gloss


1.5 g/cm³ 100% max. 92 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 136 g/l (approx. 1.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 400 - 500 µm 2.5 m²/l for 400 µm, 2 m²/l for 500 µm * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 22 days * 5 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 50 - 100 µm substrate temperature should be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew –point during application and curing dry and free from any contamination –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 10°C


Full cure after



SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT



none

30 minutes at 20°C * * see additional data

– twin feed hot airless spray heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minimum of 60:1 –pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down –of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible –









dft in µm 400 500



Induction time

Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT





5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


with itself maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine


with itself, SigmaCover 525 and SigmaCover 456







/4

October 2009

SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT


20°C 30 min.30°C 20 min.









PDS 7746 241652 black 8000002200


REFERENCES

/2

October 20092 pages Revision of September 2005

heat resistant modifi ed alkyd aluminium fi nish

– heat resistant up to 175°C high brilliancy – spray application improves the appearance – a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20°C should be allowed before exposure –to heat

aluminium - gloss


1.0 g/cm³ 47 ± 2% max. 411 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 417 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 25 µm per coat 18.8 m²/l for 25 µm 3 hours at 5 - 10°C, 1 hour at 20°C min. 36 hours at 5 - 10°C, 16 hours at 20°C max. unlimited at least 12 months,longer storage period may affect the brilliancy

– previous coat; (e.g. Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point –

for heat resistant systems - see system sheet 3140


no thinner should be added approx. 0.33 - 0.38 mm (= 0.013 - 0.015 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1700 - 2130 p.s.i.)


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C








SIGMATHERM 175

/2

October 2009

SIGMATHERM 175


Thinner 20-05










PDS 7260 136663 aluminium 9000002200


CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3

October 20093 pages Revision of February 2008

two component high build heat resistant phenolic epoxy coating

– suitable as heat resistant system under insulation up to 230°C good anticorrosive properties – good application properties, resulting in a smooth layer – no post curing is required to obtain mechanical strength –

pink, grey - eggshell


1.7 g/cm³ 68 ± 2% max. 195 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 329 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 150 µm * 4.5 m²/l for 150 µm * 2 - 3 hours at 20°C, 14 - 16 hours at 5°C min. 8 hours * max. 14 days * see curing table *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of –SigmaTherm 230 substrate temperature must be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew point –during application and curing





DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after




Induction time

Pot life

SIGMATHERM 230

/3

October 2009

SIGMATHERM 230




Thinner 90-53



Overcoating table for SigmaTherm 230 for dft up to 150 µm


5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




substrate temperature full cure5°C 7 days10°C 5 days15°C 4 days20°C 3 days30°C 2 days




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

October 2009

SIGMATHERM 230


5°C 8 hours10°C 6 hours15°C 4 hours20°C 2 hours30°C 1 hour








PDS 7445 273020 pink 6007001400 273021 pink 6007002200 273022 grey 5000001400 273023 grey 5000002200


REFERENCES

/3


heat resistant silicone/acrylic fi nish

– heat resistant up to 350°C to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces – widely compatible with inorganic zinc primers – excellent resistance against weathering – a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20°C should be allowed before exposure –to heat

white, aluminium (other colours on request) - semigloss


1.2 g/cm³ (white)

1.1 g/cm³ (aluminium) 39 ± 2% (white)42 ± 2% (aluminium) max. 492 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (white)max. 491 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (aluminium) max. 590 g/l (approx. 4.9 lb/gal) (white)max. 540 g/l (approx. 4.5 lb/gal) (aluminium) 25 - 30 µm 15.6 m²/l for 25 µm (white)16.8 m²/l for 25 µm (aluminium) 1 - 2 hours min. 18 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months

– thermal aluminium sprayed steel or thermal zinc sprayed steel; dry and free from any contamination suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any –contamination and zinc salts steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ or ISO-Sa3, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm – substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point –

– power agitate to uniform consistency by using a mistcoat technique it is possible to apply SigmaTherm 350 on top –of a zinc silicate primer

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density

Volume solids

VOC (supplied)

Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate





SIGMATHERM 350

/3

October 2009

SIGMATHERM 350


no thinner should be added 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

for touch up and spot repair only

Thinner 21-06






AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure

BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3

October 2009

SIGMATHERM 350






PDS 7565 186132 white 7000002200 168790 aluminium 9000002200

/2


heat resistant silicone based fi nish

– heat resistant up to 450°C to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces – good weather resistance – after a drying time of 3 days at 20°C a minimum temperature of 200°C for 2 –hours is necessary to obtain suffi cient mechanical strength

aluminium - eggshell


1.0 g/cm³ 24 ± 2% max. 612 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 639 g/l (approx. 5.3 lb/gal) 30 µm 8 m²/l for 30 µm 30 min. at 20°C, 45 min. at 10°C min. 16 hours max. unlimited at least 6 months

– zinc silicate primer; (e.g. SigmaZinc 158) dry and free from any zinc salts previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination – thermal aluminium sprayed steel or thermal zinc sprayed steel; dry and free –from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point –

– power agitate to uniform consistency by using a mistcoat technique it is possible to apply SigmaTherm 450 on top –of a zinc silicate primer



for touch up and spot repair only

Thinner 21-06

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C







BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT

SIGMATHERM 450

/2

October 2009

SIGMATHERM 450










PDS 7563 186350 aluminium 9000002200

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/2


heat resistant modifi ed alkyd aluminium coating

– to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces heat resistant up to 500°C; a minimum of 200°C is necessary to fuse the –aluminium coating a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20°C should be allowed before exposure –to heat application by spray improves the appearance –



1.1 g/cm³ 32 ± 2% max. 561 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 600 g/l (approx. 5.0 lb/gal) 25 µm 12.8 m²/l for 25 µm 3 hours at 5 - 10°C, 1 hour at 20°C min. 48 hours at 5 - 10°C, 24 hours at 20°C max. no limitations at least 12 months,longer storage period may affect the brilliancy

– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ or ISO-Sa3, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm

for heat resistant systems - see system sheet 3140


no thinner should be added approx. 0.38 mm (= 0.015 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1140 - 1700 p.s.i.)

no thinner should be added 2 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C








SIGMATHERM 500

/2

October 2009

SIGMATHERM 500


Thinner 20-05










PDS 7261 136661 aluminium 9000002200


CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/4


one component heat resistant moisture curing (ethyl) silicate fi nish

– to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces up to 520°C when applied on top of suitable zinc silicate primers – minimizes the formation of zinc salts on atmospheric exposure – cures at temperatures down to -5°C – no post curing is required to obtain mechanical strength –

aluminium - fl at


1.2 g/cm³ 38 ± 2% max. 494 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 588 g/l (approx. 4.9 lb/gal) 40 µm * (25 µm on top of the zinc silicate) 9.5 m²/l for 40 µm 60 min. at 20°C min. 5 hours * max. unlimited, contamination must be removed 12 hours * at least 12 months

– suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts during application substrate temperatures ranging from -5°C up to +50°C are –acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – relative humidity during curing should be above 50% –

– stir thoroughly till homogeneous strain paint through a 30 - 60 mesh screen – agitate continuously during application –


Thinner 90-53 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.7 - 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.)

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place)





SIGMATHERM 520

/4

October 2009

SIGMATHERM 520

only for touch up and spot repair

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 40

dft in µm on top of zinc silicate approx.

25

it is not possible to measure the actual dft as the fi nish will soak partly into –the porous zinc silicate primer immediately after spraying the fi nish should have a completely wet –appearance excessive thickness in overlapping areas should be avoided otherwise –cracking and fl aking may occur

Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%)


-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

unlimited

curing can be accelerated by spraying water on to the coated surface 4 –hours after application the surface should be (kept) wet for the next 4 hours – relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer minimum overcoating –interval

BRUSH

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009

SIGMATHERM 520

Curing table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%)


dry to handle full cure

-5°C 2 hours 48 hours0°C 2 hours 36 hours10°C 1 hour 24 hours20°C 30 min. 12 hours30°C 15 min. 6 hours40°C 10 min. 4 hours



Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Relative humidity - substrate temperature -air temperature see information sheet 1650


REFERENCES

/4

October 2009

SIGMATHERM 520






PDS 7555 153167 aluminium 9000002180

/3

December 20093 pages

SIGMATHERM 538

one component heat resistant moisture curing (ethyl) silicate fi nish

– up to 520°C when applied on top of heat resistant fi nish on top of suitable zinc silicate primers can withstand substrate temperatures up to +540°C, under normal –atmospheric exposure conditions minimizes the formation of zinc salts on atmospheric exposure – no post curing is required to obtain mechanical strength –

white, grey - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) 1.7 g/cm³ 62 ± 2% max. 276 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 480 g/l (approx. 4.0 lb/gal) 125 µm 5.0 m²/l for 125 µm 60 min. at 20°C 12 hours * at least 12 months

– suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – relative humidity during curing should be above 50% –

– stir thoroughly till homogeneous strain paint through a 30 - 60 mesh screen – agitate continuously during application –


Thinner 21-06 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.7 - 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.)

only for touch up and spot repair

Thinner 21-06

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place)





BRUSH

CLEANING SOLVENT

/3

December 2009

SIGMATHERM 538





dft in µm 125

it is not possible to measure the actual dft as the fi nish will soak partly into –the porous zinc silicate primer immediately after spraying the fi nish should have a completely wet –appearance excessive thickness in overlapping areas should be avoided otherwise –cracking and fl aking may occur



dry to handle full cure

10°C 6 hours 48 hours20°C 4 hours 24 hours30°C 3 hours 12 hours40°C 2 hours 8 hours



Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Relative humidity - substrate temperature -air temperature see information sheet 1650

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA


REFERENCES

/3

December 2009

SIGMATHERM 538






PDS 7592 aluminium 9000002180

/2

April 20102 pages Revision of October 2009

SIGMATHERM 540

one component heat resistant moisture curing silicone aluminium

– heat resistant up to 540°C on steel, grit blasted to ISO-Sa2½ heat resistant up to 400°C on rusted steel, power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 – to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces – no heat cure necessary between coats – excellent resistance against weathering – also suitable on top of zinc silicate primer – a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20°C should be allowed before exposure –to heat


(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) 1.1 g/cm³ 45 ± 2% max. 427 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 478 g/l (approx. 4.0 lb/gal) 25 μm 18 m²/l for 25 μm 45 min. min. 16 hours at least 6 months

– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm steel; pretreated according to ISO-St3 – suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any –contamination and zinc salts substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point –

– power agitate to uniform consistency


for roller application the best results will be obtained by using fi ne foam type rollers

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place)




BRUSH/ROLLER

/2

April 2010

SIGMATHERM 540

Thinner 21-06










PDS 7564 218773 aluminium 9000002200 218772 aluminium 9000001500

CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3

October 20093 pages Revision of April 2007

fast drying one component water borne anticorrosive shop primer

– suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates good cutting and welding properties (electrodes) – provides corrosion protection up to 6 months, when applied at a dft of 30 µm –(depending on exposure conditions and blasting profi le) fast drying properties – can be used as a fi rst coat in various paint systems for atmospheric –exposure conditions only reduced explosion risk and fi re hazard –

redbrown - fl at


1.4 g/cm³ 41 ± 2% max. 12 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 17 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) 30 µm 13.7 m²/l 12 min. at substrate temperature of 20°C3 min. at substrate temperature of 40°C + ventilation min. 12 hours max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition at least 6 months

– steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm for automatic application a substrate temperature between 35 - 40°C is –recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – adequate ventilation is required – preferably relative humidity should not exceed 75% or the drying and –performance of the coating will be adversely affected

– during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme –below

contamination to be removedweldseams SPSS-Pt2burned areas SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)damaged corroded areas SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C

Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry fi lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after





SIGMAWELD 10

/3

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 10

– some addition of water might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature stir well before use – the temperature of the paint should be above 15°C – strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen – agitate continuously during application – must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport –


tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.2 - 0.3 MPa (= approx. 2 - 3 bar; 28 - 43 p.s.i.)














CLEANING SOLVENT

CLEANING PROCEDURE

/3

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 10










PDS 7179 168298 redbrown 2008002200

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3


fast drying one component alkyd based anticorrosive prefabrication primer

– suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates good cutting and welding properties (electrodes) – provides corrosion protection up to 6 months, when applied at a dft of 30 µm –(depending on exposure conditions and blasting profi le) fast drying properties – can be used as a fi rst coat in various paint systems for atmospheric –exposure conditions only

redbrown - fl at


1.3 g/cm³ 40 ± 2% max. 396 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 527 g/l (approx. 4.4 lb/gal) 30 µm 13.3 m²/l 10 min. at substrate temperature of 20°C3 min. at substrate temperature of 40°C + ventilation min. 12 hours max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition at least 6 months

– steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm for automatic application a substrate temperature between 35 - 40°C is –recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point –



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






SIGMAWELD 15

/3

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 15

– stir well before use the temperature of the paint should be above 15°C – strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen – some addition of thinner might be necessary depending on routing, line –speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application –


Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.15 - 0.2 MPa (= approx. 1.5 - 2 bar; 21 - 28 p.s.i.)

Thinner 21-06








CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 15






PDS 7112 171947 redbrown 0000002200

/3


two component polyamide cured epoxy prefabrication primer

– suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates good cutting and welding properties, including MMA and gravity welding – provides corrosion protection up to 6 months, when applied at a dft of 22 µm –(depending on exposure conditions and blasting profi le) fast drying properties – can be used as a fi rst coat in various paint systems for atmospheric –exposure conditions only

redbrown - fl at


1.1 g/cm³ 21 ± 2% max. 593 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 653 g/l (approx. 5.4 lb/gal) 22 µm 9.5 m²/l for 22 µm 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20°C4 min. at substrate temperature of 40°C min. 12 hours max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition


at least 12 months

– steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm for automatic application a substrate temperature between 35 - 40°C is –recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point –



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






SIGMAWELD 120

/3

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 120


the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above –15°C strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen – mixed paint is ready for use – some addition of thinner (Thinner 90-53) might be necessary depending on –routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application –

24 hours at 20°C


Thinner 90-53 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.15 - 0.2 MPa (= approx. 1.5 - 2 bar; 21 - 28 p.s.i.)

Thinner 90-53






Pot life



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/3

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 120






PDS 7173 179591 redbrown 2008002200

/4

December 20094 pages Revision of September 2009

SIGMAWELD 165

two component moisture curing, zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer

– suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties – good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in –various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides corrosion protection up to 9 months, when applied at a dft of 13 µm –(depending on exposure conditions and blasting profi le) can be used as a fi rst coat in various paint systems – suitable for sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic –protection systems excellent thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work –procedures no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface – approved by Lloyd's Register of Shipping for use as prefabrication primer –(see sheet 1880) Health certifi cate from North of England Industrial Health Service (see sheet –1881)

grey, reddish grey - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm³ 30 ± 2% max. 428 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 645 g/l (approx. 5.4 lb/gal) 13 µm - see further:"Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 20 m²/l for 13 µm 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20°C3 min. at substrate temperature of 40°C min. 3 days max. 9 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition


binder: at least 9 monthspaste: at least 12 months

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C





/4

December 2009

SIGMAWELD 165

– on steel blasted to above profi le, the recommended dft, 13 µm, corresponds to 15 µm as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed fi lm is 13 µm measured on a smooth test –panel substrate temperature may be up to max. 50°C – for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30°C is recommended – Depending on exact substrate temperature and actual condition on side a –different thinner may be required substrate temperature at least 3°C above dew point – relative humidity during curing should be above 50% and below 85% – dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size –classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnifi cation (ISO 8502-3:1992)

primers system sheet: 3015




contamination to be removed orISO 8501-3 grade P2

to be removed

weldseams ISO-Sa2½ (SPSS-Pt3) orISO 8501-3 grade P2

SPSS-Pt2

burned ISO-Sa2½ (SPSS-Pt3) orISO 8501-3 grade P2

SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)

damaged corroded ISO-Sa2½ (SPSS-Pt3) orISO 8501-3 grade P2

SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)

white rust SPSS-ID Pt2 (SCAP *) orISO 8501-3 grade P2

SPSS-ID Pt1 (SCAP *)

* cleaning by silicon carbide impregnated abrasive pad

Dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnifi cation (ISO 8502-3). Note that the back of welded plate may show discoloration (especially on plate where fi llets have been welded on), this is not to be confused with burned areas and does not require special treatment.




/4

December 2009

SIGMAWELD 165

Burned through areas may be present (this happens especially when welding thin steel) and these should then be treated as per 'burned areas' above.

mixing ratio by volume: binder to paste 55 : 45

the temperature of the mixture of binder and paste should preferably be –above 15°C stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder – add gradually one third of the binder to the pigment paste – stir thoroughly till homogeneous – add remaining binder and continue stirring until the mixture is homogeneous – strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen – mixed paint is ready for use – some addition of thinner (Thinner 90-53) might be necessary depending on –routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application –

24 hours at 20°C

Thinner 90-53 0 - 35%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.49 - 0.64 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1140 - 1700 p.s.i.) Note: Depending on exact application conditions a different thinner may be required to ensure optimal application properties. Consult the PPG Protective & Marine Coatings representative in your area when required.

Thinner 90-53 0 - 35%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.)

recommended Thinner 90-53





Pot life



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


/4

December 2009

SIGMAWELD 165







PDS 7171 179169 reddish grey 5010002180 244462 grey 0000002180

REFERENCES

/4


two component moisture curing, low zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer

– suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties – good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in –various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides regular, smooth weld seams – low fume release during welding and cutting – no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface – excellent thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work –procedures can be used as a fi rst coat in various paint systems – suitable for sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic –protection systems approved by Lloyd's Register of Shipping for use as prefabrication primer –(see sheet 1880) Health certifi cate from North of England Industrial Health Service (see sheet –1881)

redbrown (grey on request) - fl at


1.2 g/cm³ 25 ± 2% max. 552 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 680 g/l (approx. 5.7 lb/gal) 18 µm - see further:"Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 11.4 m²/l for 18 µm 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20°C3 min. at substrate temperature of 40°C min. 3 days max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C





SIGMAWELD 190

/4

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 190

– steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 µm on steel blasted to above profi le, the recommended dft, 18 µm, corresponds –to 22 µm as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed fi lm is 15 µm measured on a smooth test –panel substrate temperature may be up to max. 35°C – for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30°C is recommended – substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – relative humidity during curing should be above 50% and below 85% – dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size –classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnifi cation (ISO 8502-3:1992)






to be removed


SPSS-Pt2


SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)


SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)




Dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnifi cation (ISO 8502-3). Note that the back of welded plate may show discoloration (especially on plate where fi llets have been welded on), this is not to be confused with burned areas and does not require special treatment. Burned through areas may be present (this happens especially when welding thin steel) and these should then be treated as per 'burned areas' above.




/4

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 190

mixing ratio by volume: binder to paste 66.7 : 33.3


24 hours at 20°C


no thinner should be added 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.)







Pot life



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/4

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 190






PDS 7167 179171 redbrown 2008002180 179172 grey 5000002180

/4


two component moisture curing, low zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer

– suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties – good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in –various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides regular, smooth weld seams – low fume release during welding and cutting – no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface – excellent thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work –procedures can be used as a fi rst coat in various paint systems – suitable for sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic –protection systems approved by Lloyd's Register of Shipping for use as prefabrication primer –(see sheet 1880) Health certifi cate from North of England Industrial Health Service (see sheet –1881)

redbrown (grey on request) - fl at


1.3 g/cm³ 25 ± 2% max. 521 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 676 g/l (approx. 5.6 lb/gal) 18 µm - see further:"Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 11.4 m²/l for 18 µm 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20°C3 min. at substrate temperature of 40°C min. 3 days max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C





SIGMAWELD 199

/4

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 199

– steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 30 - 75 µm on steel blasted to above profi le, the recommended dft, 18 µm, corresponds –to 22 µm as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed fi lm is 15 µm measured on a smooth test –panel substrate temperature may be up to max. 35°C – for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30°C is recommended – substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – relative humidity during curing should be above 50% and below 85% – dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size –classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnifi cation (ISO 8502-3:1992)






to be removed


SPSS-Pt2


SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)


SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)




Dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnifi cation (ISO 8502-3). Note that the back of welded plate may show discoloration (especially on plate where fi llets have been welded on), this is not to be confused with burned areas and does not require special treatment. Burned through areas may be present (this happens especially when welding thin steel) and these should then be treated as per 'burned areas' above.




/4

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 199

mixing ratio by volume: binder to paste 66.7 : 33.3


24 hours at 20°C


no thinner should be added 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.)







Pot life



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


REFERENCES

/4

October 2009

SIGMAWELD 199







/3


one component zinc rich epoxy primer

– good anticorrosive properties, the dry fi lm contains 90% zinc by weight designed for repair of two component zinc epoxy primers and zinc silicate –primers can be used as a reconditioner for aged derusted galvanised steel – dries at temperatures down to -10°C – dry heat resistance 125°C with peaks up to 175°C – the superimposed system must be unsaponifi able – quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval –

grey - fl at


2.4 g/cm³ 38 ± 2% max. 246 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 584 g/l (approx. 4.9 lb/gal) 35 µm 10.9 m²/l for 35 µm 30 min. at 10°C, 5 min. at 15°C, 4 min. at 20°C min. 2 hours at 20°C * max. several months at least 12 months * see additional data

– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm aged hot-dip galvanised steel with rusty spots; thoroughly derusted to ISO- –St3 or ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm zinc rich epoxies and zinc silicates; dry and free from any contamination – substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – can be applied down to -10°C provided the surface is free from moisture and –ice



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






SIGMAZINC 19

/3

October 2009

SIGMAZINC 19


Thinner 91-79 0 - 3%

Thinner 90-53



Overcoating table for SigmaZinc 19 for dft up to 35 µm


-10°C 5°C 10°C 20°C

with SigmaCover 522, SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456

minimum interval


maximum interval

several months when free from zinc salts and contamination

zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should –not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure –conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 14 days can be tolerated, –but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high –pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning when a long overcoating interval is required, it is recommended to overcoat –SigmaZinc 19 as soon as possible with a suitable sealer coat


Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA


REFERENCES

/3

October 2009

SIGMAZINC 19

Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490






PDS 7370 136782 grey 0000001800

/4

October 20094 pages Revision of March 2007

two component polyamide cured zinc epoxy primer

– economical zinc epoxy primer for various paint systems good corrosion prevention properties – quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval – can serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems for a total –repair the superimposed system must be unsaponifi able – complies with SSPC-Paint 20 –

grey - fl at


2.1 g/cm³ 55 ± 2% max. 193 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 410 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 25 - 50 µm depending on blasting profi le; dfts of more then 50 µm are not recommended 22 m²/l for 25 µm * 15 min. at 20°C * min. 6 hours * max. several months * 7 days


at least 12 months

– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm substrate temperature should be above 10°C and at least 3°C above dew –point



none

24 hours at 20°C, 6 hours at 35°C

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C



Curing time




Induction time

Pot life

SIGMAZINC 102

/4

October 2009

SIGMAZINC 102


Thinner 91-92 0 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2.2 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 43 - 85 p.s.i.)

Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 25 35 50




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

October 2009

SIGMAZINC 102

Overcoating table for dft 25 - 50 µm


5°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum intervalinterior


maximum intervalexterior

14 days in clean conditions

zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should –not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean – interior exposure conditions in industrial or marine conditions or if a long recoat interval is required, it is –recommended to apply a suitable sealer direct after the minimum recoating interval before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high –pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning

Curing table



10°C 40 min. 4 hours 20 days15°C 30 min. 2 hours 10 days20°C 15 min. 2 hours 7 days30°C 10 min. 1 hour 5 days

SigmaZinc 102 can be applied at temperatures down to 5°C, but the curing –rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: –SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)



/4

October 2009

SIGMAZINC 102







PDS 7402 179384 grey 0000001800

REFERENCES

/4


two component high solids polyamide cured zinc epoxy primer

– very good primer for systems with high solids epoxy buildcoats can also be used as a system primer for various other paint systems – good anticorrosive properties – quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval – complies with SSPC-Paint 20 –

grey, redbrown - fl at


2.4 g/cm³ 66 ± 2% max. 120 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 286 g/l (approx. 2.4 lb/gal) 60 - 150 µm depending on system 11.0 m²/l for 60 µm * 2 hours min. 6 hours * max. several months * 7 days



– for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to • SPSS-Ss

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to • SPSS or powertool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



SIGMAZINC 102 HS

/4

September 2009

SIGMAZINC 102 HS



none

8 hours at 20°C



Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 60 75 100 150


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMAZINC 102 HS

Overcoating table for SigmaZinc 102 HS for dft up to 100 µm


10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval


zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should –not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean – interior exposure conditions in industrial or marine conditions or if a long recoat interval is required, it is –recommended to apply a suitable sealer direct after the minimum recoating interval before overcoating any visible surface contamination must be removed by –high pressure water cleaning, sandwashing, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning




10°C 5 hours 6 hours 20 days15°C 3 hours 4 hours 10 days20°C 2 hours 3 hours 7 days30°C 1 hour 1.5 hour 5 days

SigmaZinc 102 HS can be applied at temperatures between 5°C and 10°C, –but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: –SigmaZinc 19 or SigmaFast 302 adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)



/4

September 2009

SIGMAZINC 102 HS

Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490







REFERENCES

/4

September 20094 pages Revision of March 2007

two component zinc rich polyamide cured epoxy primer

– designed as a system primer for various paint systems good corrosion prevention properties – quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval – can also serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems when a –short overcoating interval is required topcoats must be unsaponifi able – certifi cate for welding: see sheet 1880 – complies with SSPC-Paint 20 and ISO 12944.5 –

grey - fl at


2.7 g/cm³ 46 ± 2% max. 174 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 469 g/l (approx. 3.9 lb/gal) 25 - 40 µm depending on blasting profi le 11.5 m²/l for 40 µm * 10 min. * min. 6 hours * max. several months * 7 days *



– steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm SigmaZinc 109 must not be applied at a temperature below 5°C – substrate temperature must be above 5°C and at least 3°C above dew point –during application and curing



none

48 hours at 20°C, 6 hours at 35°C

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Curing time




Induction time

Pot life

SIGMAZINC 109

/4

September 2009

SIGMAZINC 109



Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%

Thinner 90-53





dft in µm 25 40

Overcoating table for Sigmazinc 109 for dft up to 40 µm


10°C 20°C 30°C

with SigmaCover 522, SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456

minimum interval


maximum interval on surface free from zinc salts; several months

zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should –not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean – interior exposure conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 14 days can be tolerated, –but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2009

SIGMAZINC 109

before overcoating any visible surface contamination must be removed by –sandwashing, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning when a longer overcoating interval is required, it is recommended to –overcoat SigmaZinc 109 as soon as possible with SigmaCover 522


substrate temperature touch dry full cure10°C 30 min. 20 days15°C 20 min. 10 days20°C 10 min. 7 days30°C 8 min. 5 days

SigmaZinc 109 can be applied at temperatures down to 5°C, but the curing –rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: –SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)




REFERENCES

/4

September 2009

SIGMAZINC 109






PDS 7401 179500 grey 0000001800

/4

July 20114 pages Revision of December 2009

SIGMAZINC 109 HS

two component high solids polyamide adduct cured zinc rich epoxy primer

– designed as a system primer for various paint systems excellent anticorrosive properties – quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval – can serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems for a total –repair very good primer for systems with high solids epoxy buildcoats – complies with SSPC-Paint 20 and ISO 12944.5 –


(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.8 g/cm³ 66 ± 2% max. 106 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 299 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 60 - 150 μm depending on system 11.0 m²/l for 60 μm * 2.5 hours * min. 4 hours * max. several months * 7 days




for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to • SPSS or powertool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/4

July 2011

SIGMAZINC 109 HS



none

8 hours at 20°C



Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 60 75 100 150


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

July 2011

SIGMAZINC 109 HS

Overcoating table for dft 100 μm


10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

3 months when free from zinc salts and contamination

zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should –not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure –conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 3 months can be –tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high –pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning




10°C 5 hours 6 hours 20 days15°C 3 hours 4 hours 10 days20°C 2.5 hours 3 hours 7 days30°C 1 hour 1.5 hour 5 days

SigmaZinc 109 HS can be applied at temperatures between 5°C and 10°C, –but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: –SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)



/4

July 2011

SIGMAZINC 109 HS







284209 grey 5000001800 218766 reddish grey 5010001800 PDS 7701

REFERENCES

/6

May 20116 pages Revision of October 2009

SIGMAZINC 158

two component moisture curing zinc (ethyl) silicate primer

– anticorrosive primer for structural steel suitable as a system primer in various paint systems based on –unsaponifi able binders galvanic action eliminates sub fi lm corrosion – can withstand substrate temperatures from -90°C up to +400°C, under –normal atmospheric exposure conditions when suitably topcoated provides excellent corrosion protection for steel –substrates up to +520°C good low temperature curing – good impact and abrasion resistance – must not be exposed to alkaline (more than pH 9) or acidic (less than pH –5.5) liquids certifi cate for ASTM A-490 class 'B' for slip co-effi cient – complies with SSPC-Paint 20 –

grey, greenish grey - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.3 g/cm³ 65 ± 2% max. 219 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 507 g/l (approx. 4.2 lb/gal) average dft 75 μm with a minimum of 60 μm on smooth non pitted, blast cleaned steelaverage dft 100 μm with a minimum of 75 μm on rough or pitted, blast cleaned steel 8.7 m²/l for 75 μm * 30 min. at 20°C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed 12 hours *



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C



Curing time


/6

May 2011

SIGMAZINC 158

– for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss, • welds, rusty and damaged areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3• weathered galvanised steel; blast cleaned to remove rust, to roughen the • surface and to remove any zinc salts which might be present

substrate temperatures from -5°C up to +50°C during application are –acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – relative humidity during curing should be above 50% –






none




Induction time

Pot life

/6

May 2011

SIGMAZINC 158



only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15%apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 μmsame for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft

Thinner 90-53

only valid for spray application if the dft is below specifi cation and an extra coat of SigmaZinc 158 has to be applied, SigmaZinc 158 should be thinned down with 25 - 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time



highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry fi lms with void spaces in between the particles



dft in μm 75 100

above 150 μm dft mudcracking can occurmax. dft when brushing: 35 μm




CLEANING SOLVENT

UPGRADING DFT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/6

May 2011

SIGMAZINC 158



-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

24 hours

24 hours

18 hours

12 hours

6 hours

4 hours

maximum interval

unlimited, provided the surface is cleaned from contamination and zinc salts

a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time – if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects –(pinholes) SigmaZinc 158 should be sealed with approved coatings SigmaZinc 158 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only –cures after suffi cient take up of water (from the atmosphere or immersion) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time before entering service or overcoating, a suffi cient degree of cure should be –obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times –are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by:


before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaZinc 158 should always be visibly –dry and checked on suffi cient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is –a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed

/6

May 2011

SIGMAZINC 158


substrate temperature dry to handle full cure-5°C 2 hours 24 hours0°C 2 hours 24 hours10°C 1 hour 18 hours20°C 30 min. 12 hours30°C 30 min. 6 hours40°C 30 min. 4 hours

SigmaZinc 158 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures –after suffi cient take up of water, (from the atmosphere) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured –during the curing time adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)




Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in confi ned spaces and health safetyExplosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in confi ned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Relative humidity - substrate temperature -air temperature see information sheet 1650


REFERENCES

/6

May 2011

SIGMAZINC 158






PDS 7558 179568 greenish grey 0000002185

/5

October 20095 pages Revision of March 2007

two component moisture curing inorganic zinc (ethyl) silicate primer

– anticorrosive primer for structural steel two component product consisting of clear binder and zinc paste – suitable as a system primer in various paint systems based on –unsaponifi able binders galvanic action eliminates sub fi lm corrosion – can withstand substrate temperatures from -90°C up to +400°C, under –normal atmospheric exposure conditions when suitably topcoated provides excellent corrosion protection for steel –substrates up to +500°C good low temperature curing – good impact and abrasion resistance – complies with SSPC-Paint 20 –

greenish grey - fl at


2.3 g/cm³ 65 ± 2% max. 218 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 503 g/l (approx. 4.2 lb/gal)

– when used as a system primer with dft 60 µm on smooth, non pitted, blast cleaned steelaverage dft 100 µm with a minimum of 75 µm on rough or pitted, blast –cleaned steel

8.7 m²/l for 75 µm * 30 min. at 20°C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed 12 hours *



– for water immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss, • welds, rusty and damaged areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 µm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3• weathered galvanised steel; blast cleaned to remove rust, to roughen the • surface and to remove any zinc salts which might be present

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C



Curing time



SIGMAZINC 160

/5

October 2009

SIGMAZINC 160

substrate temperatures from -5°C up to +50°C during application are –acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – a relative humidity of > 50% is recommended –

mixing ratio by volume: paste to binder 64.5 : 35.5

use a mechanical mixer – stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder – add the binder gradually to the paste – stir thoroughly till homogeneous – do not mix in reverse order – strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen – agitate continuously during application – agitate continuously during application (low speed) –The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended.



Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.64 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) a dedicated pump for a zinc silicate coating with constant agitation must be used


only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15%apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 µmsame for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft

Thinner 90-53


Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

/5

October 2009

SIGMAZINC 160







dft in µm 60 75 100 125



-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

24 hours

24 hours

18 hours

12 hours

6 hours

4 hours

maximum interval


a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time – if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects –(pinholes) SigmaZinc 160 should be sealed with approved coatings before entering service or overcoating, a suffi cient degree of cure should be –obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times –are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by:



UPGRADING DFT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/5

October 2009

SIGMAZINC 160



SigmaZinc 160 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only –cures after suffi cient take up of water (from the atmosphere) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time relative humidity during curing recommended to be above 50% – adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)






REFERENCES

/5

October 2009

SIGMAZINC 160






PDS 7560 179322 greenish grey 0000002180

/6


SIGMAZINC 170

two component moisture curing zinc (ethyl) silicate coating

– anticorrosive primer for structural steel high zinc content resulting in excellent corrosion protection – complies with SSPC-Paint 20 – suitable as a system primer in various paint systems based on –unsaponifi able binders galvanic action eliminates sub fi lm corrosion – good low temperature curing – good impact and abrasion resistance – must not be exposed to alkaline (more than pH 9) or acidic (less than pH –5.5) liquids

grey - fl at

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.4 g/cm³ 65 ± 2% max. 221 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 480 g/l (approx. 4.0 lb/gal)

– average dft 75 μm with a minimum of 60 μm on smooth non pitted, blast cleaned steelaverage dft 100 μm with a minimum of 75 μm on rough or pitted, blast –cleaned steel

8.7 m²/l for 75 μm * 15 min. at 20°C min. 16 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed 12 hours *



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C



Curing time


/6

March 2011

SIGMAZINC 170

– for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss, • welds, rusty and damaged areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½

for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3• weathered galvanised steel; blast cleaned to remove rust, to roughen the • surface and to remove any zinc salts which might be present

substrate temperatures from -5°C up to +50°C during application are –acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point – relative humidity should be above 50% –






none




Induction time

Pot life

/6

March 2011

SIGMAZINC 170



only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15%apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 μmsame for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft

Thinner 90-53







dft in μm 75 100 125

above 150 μm dft mudcracking can occurmax. dft when brushing: 35 μm




CLEANING SOLVENT

UPGRADING DFT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/6

March 2011

SIGMAZINC 170

Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be minimum 50%)


-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

48 hours

48 hours

48 hours

32 hours

24 hours

12 hours

maximum interval




-5°C 0°C 10°C 20°C 30°C * 40°C

minimum interval

24 hours

24 hours

24 hours

16 hours

12 hours

6 hours

maximum interval


a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time – if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects –(pinholes) SigmaZinc 170 should be sealed with approved coatings SigmaZinc 170 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only –cures after suffi cient take up of water from the atmosphere during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time before entering service or overcoating, a suffi cient degree of cure should be –obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times –are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by:



/6

March 2011

SIGMAZINC 170



SigmaZinc 170 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only –cures after suffi cient take up of water from the atmosphere during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time relative humidity during curing recommended to be above 50% – adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)






REFERENCES

/6

March 2011

SIGMAZINC 170






PDS 7570

/4


SIGMAZINC 68 HS

three component high solids polyamide adduct cured zinc epoxy primer

– designed as a system primer for various paint systems excellent anticorrosive properties – quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval – can serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems for a total –repair very good primer for systems with high solids epoxy buildcoats – complies with SSPC-Paint 20 and ISO 12944.5 – meets RSRC specifi cation for structural joints using ADTM325/ A490 bolts, –Class B


(1 g/cm³ = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.8 g/cm³ 70 ± 2% max. 288 g/l 75 μm depending on system 9.3 m²/l for 75 μm * 2 hours * min. 2 hours * max. several months * 7 days




for atmospheric exposure conditions: – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profi le 40 - 70 μm• steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to • SPSS or powertool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3


DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C


Full cure after



/4

September 2011

SIGMAZINC 68 HS

mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener to powder: 47:20:33


none

16 hours at 20°C



Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%

Thinner 90-53





dft in μm 75 100


Induction time

Pot life




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

September 2011

SIGMAZINC 68 HS

Overcoating table for dft 100 μm


10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C

minimum interval

6 hours 2 hours 1 hour 1 hour

maximum interval

3 months when free from zinc salts and contamination

zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should –not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure –conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 3 months can be –tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high –pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning




10°C 3 hours 36 hours 20 days20°C 2 hours 8 hours 7 days30°C 1 hour 4 hours 5 days

SigmaZinc 68 HS can be applied at temperatures between 5°C and 10°C, –but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: –SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing –(please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)



/4

September 2011

SIGMAZINC 68 HS







PDS 7403

REFERENCES

/3

15 July 20093 pages

one component thin-fi lm solvent borne intumescent coating for fi re protection of structural steelwork

– provides up to 60 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res off-site or on-site application – up to 1500 µm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry –internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has –been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to BS 476 and certifi ed with various national requirements –

white - matt


1.35 g/cm³ 75 ± 3% max. 257 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 µm applied in one coatnote: the required dry fi lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certifi cation 1.07 m²/l for 700 µm * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months * see additional data

– approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point during –application and drying should not be applied under 5°C and above 50°C – relative humidity during application must be lower than 85% –

– stir thoroughly till homogeneous and free of lumps too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance –

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






PASSIVE FIRE PROTECTION

PROTECTION OF STEEL FROM CELLULOSIC FIRES

STEELGUARD 551

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD 551

when needed up to 5% Thinner 21-06 may be used 20 - 50°, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.48 - 0.63 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) note: a 30 mesh / 500 µm internal fi lter is recommended

for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added

Thinner 21-06





dft in µm 200 400 700 1000 1500


Overcoating table for Steelguard 551 for dft up to 700 µm


5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval

unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited


with Steelguard 2458 substrate temperature

5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval

4 hours 2 hours 90 min. 60 min. 45 min.

maximum interval




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD 551


with other approved top coats substrate temperature

5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval


Drying table for dft up to 700 µm

substrate temperature touch dry5°C 120 min.10°C 90 min.15°C 60 min.20°C 30 min.30°C 20 min.

drying times may vary considerable depending on ambient conditions, A/V m -1 (Hp/A) of section and applied fi lm thickness


The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the coating products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specifi c enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use.




PDS 7761 287680 white 3000AM2200

/3

15 July 20093 pages


– provides up to 60 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res off-site or on-site application – up to 1500 µm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry –internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has –been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and –BS 476 and certifi ed with various national requirements

white - matt





DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C








STEELGUARD 552

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD 552



Thinner 21-06





dft in µm 200 400 700 1000 1500




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval


AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orifi ce Nozzle pressure


CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD 552



5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval










PDS 7762 299480 white 3000AM2200

/3

15 July 20093 pages


– provides 90 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res off-site or on-site application – up to 1500 µm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry –internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has –been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to BS 476 and certifi ed with the national requirements –

white - matt





DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C








STEELGUARD 553

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD 553



Thinner 21-06





dft in µm 200 400 700 1000 1500




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD 553



5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval










PDS 7763 299481 white 3000AM2200

/3

15 July 20093 pages


– provides 120 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res off-site or on-site application – up to 1500 µm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry –internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has –been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to BS 476 and certifi ed with the national requirements –

white - matt





DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C








STEELGUARD 554

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD 554



Thinner 21-06





dft in µm 200 400 700 1000 1500




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD 554



5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval










PDS 7764 299482 white 3000AM2200

/3

December 20103 pages Revision of July 2009

PASSIVE FIRE PROTECTION PROTECTION OF STEEL FROM CELLULOSIC FIRES

STEELGUARD 561


– provides up to 90 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res fast drying, providing short handling times – off-site or on-site application – up to 1000 μm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry –internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has –been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to BS 476 and certifi ed with various national requirements –

white - matt

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm³ 75 ± 3% max. 255 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 327 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1000 μm applied in one coatnote:the required dry fi lm thickness must be in accordance with theapproval certifi cation 1.07 m²/l for 700 μm * 20 minutes * min. 4 hours with itself * min. 24 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months * see additional data



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






/3

December 2010


STEELGUARD 561

when needed up to 5% Thinner 21-06 may be used 20 - 50°, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.48 - 0.63 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) note: a 30 mesh / 500 μm internal fi lter is recommended


Thinner 21-06





dft in μm 200 400 500 700 1000


Overcoating table for Steelguard 561 for dft up to 700 μm


5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval

2 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 30 min. 20 min.

maximum interval




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

December 2010


STEELGUARD 561



5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval


Drying table for dft up to 700 μm








PDS 7765 287680 white 3000AM2200

/3

15 July 20093 pages


– provides 60 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res 60 minutes SCI assesment of beams with circular web openings – fast drying, providing short handling times – off-site or on-site application – up to 1000 µm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry –internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has –been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and –BS 476 and certifi ed with various national requirements

white - matt





DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C








STEELGUARD 562

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD 562



Thinner 21-06





dft in µm 200 400 500 700 1000




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD 562



5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval










PDS 7766 white 3000AM2200

/3

April 20103 pages Revision of July 2009


STEELGUARD 563


– provides 90 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res fast drying, providing short handling times – off-site or on-site application – up to 1000 μm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry –internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has –been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and –BS 476 and certifi ed with various national requirements

white - matt

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm³ 75 ± 3% max. 255 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 327 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1000 μm applied in one coatnote: the required dry fi lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certifi cation 1.07 m²/l for 700 μm * 20 minutes * min. 4 hours with itself * min. 24 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months * see additional data



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






/3

April 2010


STEELGUARD 563

when needed up to 5% Thinner 21-06 may be used 20 - 50°, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.48 - 0.63 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) note: a 30 mesh / 500 μm internal fi lter is recommended


Thinner 21-06





dft in μm 200 400 500 700 1000




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

April 2010


STEELGUARD 563



5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval











/3

April 20103 pages Revision of July 2009


STEELGUARD 564


– provides 120 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res fast drying, providing short handling times – off-site or on-site application – up to 1000 μm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry –internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has –been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and –BS 476 and certifi ed with various national requirements

white - matt

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm³ 75 ± 3% max. 255 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 327 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1000 μm applied in one coatnote: the required dry fi lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certifi cation 1.07 m²/l for 700 μm * 20 minutes * min. 4 hours with itself * min. 24 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months * see additional data



when needed up to 5% Thinner 21-06 may be used 20 - 50°, depending on shape of steel parts

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle angle

/3

April 2010


STEELGUARD 564

approx. 0.48 - 0.63 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) note: a 30 mesh / 500 μm internal fi lter is recommended


Thinner 21-06





dft in μm 200 400 500 700 1000




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

April 2010


STEELGUARD 564



5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval











/3



STEELGUARD 581

one component thin-fi lm water borne intumescent coating for fi re protection of structural steelwork

– provides up to 90 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res 60 minutes SCI assesment of beams with circular web openings – on-site application – up to 700 μm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 and C2 internal environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal –(C1) environments no topcoat is required tested to BS 476 and certifi ed with the national requirements –

white - matt

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.43 g/cm³ 70 ± 3% max. 20 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 30 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 700 μm applied in one coatnote:the required dry fi lm thickness must be in accordance with theapproval certifi cation 1.0 m²/l for 700 μm * 2 hours * min. 16 hours with itself * min. 18 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months * see additional data

– approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point during –application and drying should not be applied under 10°C and above 40°C – relative humidity during application and drying must be lower than 80% –

– stir thoroughly till homogeneous and free of lumps too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance – must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport –

when needed up to 5% tap water may be used 20 - 50°, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) note: a 30 mesh / 500 μm internal fi lter is recommended

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C







/3

December 2010


STEELGUARD 581


tap water





dft in μm 200 400 500 700




10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



with approved top coats substrate temperature

10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

December 2010


STEELGUARD 581


substrate temperature touch dry10°C 4 hours15°C 3 hours20°C 2 hours30°C 1 hour







PDS 7769 291802 white 3000AM2200

/3

15 July 20093 pages


– provides up to 120 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res off-site or on-site application – up to 1500 µm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 and C2 internal environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal –(C1) environments no topcoat is required tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and –BS 476 and certifi ed with various national requirements

white - matt






DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C









STEELGUARD FM 549

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD FM 549


Thinner 21-06





dft in µm 200 400 700 1000 1500


Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 549 for dft up to 700 µm


5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD FM 549



5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval










PDS 7731 287671 white 3000AM2200

/4



STEELGUARD FM 550


– provides up to 120 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res off-site or on-site application – up to 1500 μm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry –internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has –been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as BS 476, –ENV 13381-4, UL 263 and certifi ed with various national requirements

white - matt

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm³ 68 ± 3% max. 293 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 325 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 μm applied in one coatnote:the required dry fi lm thickness must be in accordance with theapproval certifi cation 0.97 m²/l for 700 μm * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months * see additional data



DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C






/4

December 2010


STEELGUARD FM 550

when needed up to 5% Thinner 21-06 may be used 20 - 50°, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.48 - 0.63 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) Notes:- all fi lters including surge bottle and gun fi lters to be removed - a 30 mesh / 500 μm internal fi lter is recommended


Thinner 21-06





dft in μm 200 400 700 1000 1500


Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 550 for dft up to 700 μm


5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/4

December 2010


STEELGUARD FM 550



5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval





/4

December 2010


STEELGUARD FM 550






PDS 7732 287673 white 3000AM2200

/3

15 July 20093 pages


– provides up to 120 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res fast drying, providing short handling times – off-site or on-site application – up to 1000 µm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry –internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has –been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and –BS 476 and certifi ed with various national requirements

white, grey - matt





DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C








STEELGUARD FM 560

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD FM 560



Thinner 90-58





dft in µm 200 400 500 700 1000




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval




5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval

120 min. 90 min. 60 min. 30 min. 20 min.

maximum interval




CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

15 July 2009



STEELGUARD FM 560



5°C 10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval










PDS 7733 289363 white 3000AM2200

/3

December 20103 pages Revision of November 2009


STEELGUARD FM 585

one component thin-fi lm water borne intumescent coating for fi re protection of structural steelwork

– provides up to 90 minutes protection from cellulosic fi res on-site application – up to 700 μm dft in a single coat – suitable for C1 and C2 internal environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal –(C1) environments no topcoat is required tested to national and international standards such as BS 476, NT Fire 021, –ENV 13381-4 and certifi ed with various national requirements

white - matt

(1 g/cm³ = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m²/l = 40.7 ft²/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.43 g/cm³ 70 ± 3% max. 20 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 30 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 700 μm applied in one coatnote:the required dry fi lm thickness must be in accordance with theapproval certifi cation 1.0 m²/l for 700 μm * 2 hours * min. 16 hours with itself * min. 18 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months * see additional data

– approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3°C above dew point during –application and drying should not be applied under 10°C and above 40°C – relative humidity during application and drying must be lower than 80% –

– stir thoroughly till homogeneous and free of lumps too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance – must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport –

when needed up to 5% tap water may be used 20 - 50°, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) note: a 30 mesh / 500 μm internal fi lter is recommended

DESCRIPTION


COLOURS AND GLOSS

BASIC DATA AT 20°C







/3

December 2010


STEELGUARD FM 585


tap water





dft in μm 200 400 500 700




10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



with approved top coats substrate temperature

10°C 15°C 20°C 30°C

minimum interval


maximum interval



CLEANING SOLVENT

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ADDITIONAL DATA

/3

December 2010


STEELGUARD FM 585


substrate temperature touch dry10°C 4 hours15°C 3 hours20°C 2 hours30°C 1 hour







PDS 7735 289315 white 3000AM2200

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

2411Atmospheric corrosivity category C5I

SYSTEM

a two page issue September 2010

EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterized by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 µg per m³ air.

SPECIFICATION 1: Zinc rich epoxy/ polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel

pretreatment – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 µm/1,6-2.8 mils

paint system SigmaZinc 109HS 60 µm/ 2.4 mils

SigmaFast 370 160 µm/6.4 mils

SigmaDur 550 60 µm/ 2.4 mils

/2

STEEL PROTECTION


September 2010 GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS:

The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES

SigmaZinc 109 HS see product data SigmaFast 370 see product data SigmaDur 550 see product data Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007

Limitation of Liability - The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the Sigma Coatings products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use.


The data contained herein are liable to modification as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the user’s responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product.

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

2412Atmospheric corrosivity category C5M

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and saltspray will

accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterized by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre.

SPECIFICATION 1: A (zinc rich) epoxy/ polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel





/2

STEEL PROTECTION








/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM





suitable for steel





/2

STEEL PROTECTION








/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will


SPECIFICATION 1: A (zinc rich) epoxy/ polysiloxane system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel



PSX 700 125 µm/ 5.0 mils

/2

STEEL PROTECTION




SigmaZinc 109 HS see product data PSX 700 see product data Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

2415Atmospheric corrosivity category C4

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Industrial and coastal areas with moderate salinity.


suitable for steel



SigmaFast 370 130µm/5.2 mils


/2

STEEL PROTECTION








/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Industrial and coastal areas with moderate salinity.


suitable for steel



SigmaFast 370 130µm/5.2 mils


/2

STEEL PROTECTION








/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: This environment usually covers areas away from the cost and separate from

industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment.

SPECIFICATION 1: A (zinc rich) epoxy/ high solid polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel




/2

STEEL PROTECTION




SigmaZinc 109 HS see product data SigmaDur 590 see product data Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM




SPECIFICATION 1: An epoxy/ polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel


paint system SigmaFast 370 150 µm/ 6.0 mils


/2

STEEL PROTECTION




SigmaFast 370 see product data SigmaDur 520 see product data Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM




SPECIFICATION 1: An epoxy/ polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel




/2

STEEL PROTECTION




SigmaFast 370 see product data SigmaDur 550 see product data Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS INTERIOR: Chemical plants, wind towers .

SPECIFICATION 1: A (zinc rich) epoxy/ epoxy build coat system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel



SigmaFast 370 150 µm/ 6.0 mils

/2

STEEL PROTECTION




SigmaZinc 109 HS see product data SigmaFast 370 see product data Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS INTERIOR: Chemical plants, wind towers .

SPECIFICATION 1: An epoxy system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel




/2

STEEL PROTECTION




SigmaFast 370 see product data Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS INTERIOR: Production rooms, wind towers .

SPECIFICATION 1: An epoxy system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel




/2

STEEL PROTECTION




SigmaFast 370 see product data Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS INTERIOR: Production rooms, wind towers .

SPECIFICATION 1: A (zinc rich) epoxy / epoxy build coat system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel




/2

STEEL PROTECTION




SigmaZinc 109 HS see product data SigmaFast 370 see product data Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM




SPECIFICATION 1: A (zinc rich) epoxy/ high solid polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance

suitable for steel




/2

STEEL PROTECTION




SigmaZinc 109 HS see product data SigmaDur 590 see product data Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterized by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 µg per m³ air.


suitable for steel





/2

STEEL PROTECTION








/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4010Internal dry exposure Alkyd paint system

SYSTEM

a two page issue September 2005 revision of October 2004

EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Inside buildings with neutral atmosphere.

Relative humidity below 60%.

SPECIFICATION 1: alkyd maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair

compatible with alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, and dispersion paint

not on top of chlorinated rubber, vinyl, bitumen, and epoxy tar paint

suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium

pretreatment – intact areas, to be roughened – damaged and rusty areas; – galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 35 µm/1.4 mils – steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 35 µm/1.4 mils

paint system Sigmarine 40 35 µm/1.4 mils Sigmarine 49 35 µm/1.4 mils

note if a semigloss finish is required, Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41

SPECIFICATION 2: alkyd system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium

pretreatment complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering



SPECIFICATION 3: fast drying alkyd new construction system

pretreatment steel; derusted to ISO-St3 - SPSS - Pt2

paint system SigmaFast 20 60 µm/2.4 mils SigmaFast 40 50 µm/2.0 mils

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4010Internal dry exposure Alkyd paint system

SYSTEM

September 2005 REFERENCES

SigmaFast 20 see product data sheet 7155 SigmaFast 40 see product data sheet 7234 Sigmarine 24 see product data sheet 7135 Sigmarine 40 see product data sheet 7240 Sigmarine 41 see product data sheet 7256 Sigmarine 49 see product data sheet 7213 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007

Limitation of Liability - The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the products made by Sigma Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use.

Sigma Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Sigma Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise).


/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4011Internal dry exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Inside buildings with neutral atmosphere

Relative humidity below 60%.

SPECIFICATION 1: recoatable epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair

compatible with alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl and dispersion paint

not on top of bitumen and epoxy tar paint


pretreatment – intact areas, to be roughened – damaged and rusty areas;

– galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with SigmaCover 256 in a dft of 50 µm/2 mils – steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 256 in a dft of 50 µm/2 mils

paint system SigmaDur 550 50 µm/2.0 mils

note if a semigloss finish is required, SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 or SigmaDur 580

SPECIFICATION 2: recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium

pretreatment complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering

paint system SigmaCover 256 50 µm/2.0 mils SigmaDur 550 50 µm/2.0 mils


/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4011Internal dry exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

SYSTEM

September 2005

SPECIFICATION 3: epoxy polyurethane system for new construction especially suitable for in-shop application

pretreatment steel; derusted to ISO-St3 or SPSS-Pt2 galvanised steel: free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering

paint system SigmaFast 205 50 µm/2.0 mils SigmaDur 550 50 µm/2.0 mils


REFERENCES

SigmaCover 256 see product data sheet 7412 SigmaDur 520 see product data sheet 7524 SigmaDur 550 see product data sheet 7537 SigmaDur 580 see product data sheet 7530 SigmaFast 205 see product data sheet 7802 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4012Internal dry exposure Acrylic dispersion system

SYSTEM

a two page issue June 2004 revision of 7-2003


Relative humidity below 60%. Complies with ISO 12944, Part 2, corrosivity category C1.

SPECIFICATION 1: acrylic dispersion maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair

compatible with alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl, dispersion and epoxy tar paint


pretreatment – intact areas, to be roughened – damaged and rusty areas; – galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with Sigma Aquacover 22 in a dft of 50 µm/2 mils – steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. ISO-Sa2½ and primed with Sigma Aquacover 20 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils

paint system Sigma Aquacover 40 50 µm/2.0 mils

note acrylic dispersion paints require adequate ventilation to obtain sufficient drying conditions

SPECIFICATION 2: acrylic dispersion system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium

pretreatment complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2½ and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering

paint system Sigma Aquacover 20 75 µm/3.0 mils Sigma Aquacover 40 50 µm/2.0 mils

note – acrylic dispersion paints require adequate ventilation to obtain sufficient drying conditions – on galvanised steel or aluminium Sigma Aquacover 22 should be used instead of Sigma Aquacover 20

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4012Internal dry exposure Acrylic dispersion system

SYSTEM

July 2003

SPECIFICATION 3: acrylic dispersion system for new construction

pretreatment derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2½ or SPSS-Pt3



REFERENCES

Sigma Aquacover 22 see product data sheet 7145 Sigma Aquacover 20 see product data sheet 7149 Sigma Aquacover 40 see product data sheet 7251 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/1

4016INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM

SYSTEM

a one page issue June 2004 revision of 12-2003


Relative humidity below 60%. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C1.

SPECIFICATION 1 waterborne epoxy system, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium

pretreatment steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ galvanised steel and aluminium; degreased and roughened by suitable means (e.g. sand papering)

coating system Sigma Aquacover 400 75 µm/3.0 mils

expected durability low (ISO-12944 part 5)

maintenance should preferably be carried out according to this specification

REFERENCES

Sigma Aquacover 400 see product data sheet 7871 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specification for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4020Internal wet exposure Alkyd paint system

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Inside buildings where condensation may occur.

Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%.


compatible with alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane and dispersion paint

not on top of chlorinated rubber, vinyl, bitumen and epoxy tar paint

not suitable for galvanised steel and aluminium

pretreatment – intact areas; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering – damaged and rusty areas; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 50 µm/2 mils



SPECIFICATION 2: alkyd system for a total repair or new construction


pretreatment complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2

paint system Sigmarine 24 50 µm/2.0 mils Sigmarine 40 35 µm/1.4 mils Sigmarine 49 35 µm/1.4 mils


/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4020Internal wet exposure Alkyd paint system

SYSTEM

September 2005

SPECIFICATION 3: fast drying alkyd new construction system

pretreatment steel derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2

paint system SigmaFast 20 60 µm/2.4 mils SigmaFast 20 50 µm/2.0 mils SigmaFast 40 50 µm/2.0 mils

REFERENCES





/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4021Internal wet exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Inside buildings where condensation may occur



compatible with alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl and dispersion paint



pretreatment – intact areas, to be roughened – damaged and rusty areas; – galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 60 µm/2.4 mils – steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 256 in a dft of 60 µm/2.4 mils


note if a semigloss finish is required, SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520

SPECIFICATION 2: recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for a total repair, or new construction


pretreatment complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering

paint system SigmaCover 280 60 µm/2.4 mils SigmaCover 456 50 µm/2.0 mils SigmaDur 550 50 µm/2.0 mils


/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4021Internal wet exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

SYSTEM

September 2005

SPECIFICATION 3: epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction especially suitable for in-shop application

pretreatment steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2



REFERENCES SigmaCover 256 see product data sheet 7412 SigmaCover 280 see product data sheet 7417 SigmaCover 456 see product data sheet 7466 SigmaDur 520 see product data sheet 7524 SigmaDur 550 see product data sheet 7537 SigmaFast 205 see product data sheet 7802 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4022Internal wet exposure Acrylic dispersion system

SYSTEM





compatible with alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl, dispersion and epoxy tar paint


pretreatment – intact areas, to be roughened – damaged and rusty areas; – galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with Sigma Aquacover 22 in a dft of 50 µm/2 mils – steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. ISO-Sa2½ and primed with Sigm Aquacover 20 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils


note acrylic dispersion paints require adequate ventilation to obtain sufficient drying conditions

SPECIFICATION 2: acrylic dispersion system for a total repair or new construction


pretreatment complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2½ and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering

paint system Sigma Aquacover 20 75 µm/3.0 mils Sigma Aquacover 40 50 µm/2.0 mils Sigma Aquacover 40 50 µm/2.0 mils


/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4022Internal wet exposure Acrylic dispersion system

SYSTEM

June 2004


pretreatment steel; derusted to ISO Sa2½ or SPSS-Pt3


REFERENCES





/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4024Internal wet exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue October 2004 revision of 7-2003



SPECIFICATION 1: surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair

compatible with alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint

not on top of chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint


pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination – damaged and corroded areas; – steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of 60 µm/2.4 mils – galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened,dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 60 µm/2.4 mils


SPECIFICATION 2: surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction


pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting


notes – a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630

SYSTEM

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4024Internal wet exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system

SYSTEM

October 2004

SPECIFICATION 3: high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction



REFERENCES

SigmaCover 280 see product data sheet 7417 SigmaCover 630 see product data sheet 7430 SigmaCover 805 see product data sheet 7726 SigmaDur 580 see product data sheet 7530 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/1

4026INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM

SYSTEM

a one page issue June 2004 Revision 12-2003


Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C2.

SPECIFICATION 1 waterborne epoxy system, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium

pretreatment steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ galvanised steel and aluminium; degreased and roughened by suitable means (e.g. sand papering)

coating system Sigma aquacover 400 100 µm/4.0 mils

expected durability medium (ISO-12944 part 5)


REFERENCES

Sigma aquacover 400 see product data sheet 7871 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specification for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4030Rural atmospheric exposureAlkyd paint system

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate

from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 µg per m³ air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain.





pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination – intact areas; to be roughened – damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 50 µm/2 mils


note if a semigloss finish is required Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41



pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min.ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2

paint system Sigmarine 24 50 µm/2.0 mils Sigmarine 40 35 µm/1.4 mils Sigmarine 49 35 µm/1.4 mils

note if a semigloss finish is required Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4030Rural atmospheric exposure Alkyd paint system

SYSTEM

September 2005

SPECIFICATION 3: fast drying alkyd new construction system pretreatment steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 paint system SigmaFast 20 60 µm/2.4 mils

SigmaFast 20 50 µm/2.0 mils SigmaFast 40 50 µm/2.0 mils

GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS:






/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4031Rural atmospheric exposureRecoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

SYSTEM





compatible with alkyd, epoxy, chlorinated rubber, vinyl and polyurethane paint



pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination – intact areas; to be roughened – damaged and corroded areas; – steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of75 µm/3.0 mils – galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 µm/3.0 mils



SPECIFICATION 2: recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for a total repair or new construction


pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering

paint system SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) 75 µm/3.0 mils SigmaCover 456 50 µm/2.0 mils SigmaDur 550 50 µm/2.0 mils

Notes – if a semigloss finish is required, SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 – a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4031Rural atmospheric exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

SYSTEM

September 2005

SPECIFICATION 3: recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction

pretreatment steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2


Notes – if a semigloss finish is required, SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520



SigmaCover 456 see product data sheet 7466 SigmaCover 630 see product data sheet 7430 SigmaDur 520 see product data sheet 7524 SigmaDur 550 see product data sheet 7537 SigmaFast 205 see product data sheet 7802 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4032Rural atmospheric exposureAcrylic dispersion system

SYSTEM




Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C3.


compatible with alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint



pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination – intact areas; to be roughened – damaged and corroded areas; – steel; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2½ and primed with Sigma Aquacover 20 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils – galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened and primed Sigma Aquacover 22 in a dft of 50 µm/2 mils


SPECIFICATION 2: acrylic dispersion system for a total repair


pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system, derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2½ and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering


note for galvanised steel and aluminium Sigma Aquacover 20 should be replaced by Sigma Aquacover 22

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4032Rural atmospheric exposure Acrylic dispersion system

SYSTEM

June 2004


pretreatment steel; derusted to ISO Sa2½ or SPSS-Pt3



Because of the waterborn character of this type of paint, good weather conditions are essential to obtain maximum performance The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES





/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4034Rural atmospheric exposureHigh solids epoxy/polyurethane system








pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination – damaged and corroded areas; – steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of 60 µm/2.4 mils – galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 60 µm/2.4 mils


SPECIFICATION 2: surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction




notes – a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630 – 2 primer coats applied by roller may be replaced by 1 coat of 125 µm/5 mils dft when applied by airless spray

SYSTEM

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4034Rural atmospheric exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system

SYSTEM

October 2004

SPECIFICATION 3: high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction









/2

4036RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSUREWATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM

SYSTEM

a two page issue June 2004 revision of 12-2003 EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate

from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 µg per m³ air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C3.

SPECIFICATION 1 waterborne epoxy system, suitable for steel

pretreatment steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½

coating system Sigma aquacover 200 75 µm/3.0 mils Sigma aquacover 400 75 µm/3.0 mils

expected durability medium (ISO-12944 part 5)



The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more.

/2

4036RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSUREWATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM

SYSTEM

June 2004 REFERENCES

Sigma aquacover 200 see product data sheet 7870 Sigma aquacover 400 see product data sheet 7871 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specification for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4040Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposureAlkyd paint system

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical

pollution will accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 µg per m³ air. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain.

SPECIFICATION 1: alkyd maintenance system for intact areas and spotrepair




pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination – intact areas; to be roughened – damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with 2 coats Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 2 x 40 µm (1.6 mils)


note – if a semigloss finish is required, Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41

– finishes in, mio or aluminium are available on request



pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min.ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2

paint system Sigmarine 24 40 µm/1.6 mils Sigmarine 24 40 µm/1.6 mils Sigmarine 40 35 µm/1.4 mils Sigmarine 49 35 µm/1.4 mils

note – if a semigloss finish is required, Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41

– finishes in, mio or aluminium are available on request

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4040Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposureAlkyd paint system

SYSTEM

September 2005

SPECIFICATION 3: fast drying alkyd system for new construction, especially suitable for in-shop application

pretreatment – steel; blast cleaned to ISO Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO St3 – shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2

paint system SigmaFast 20 75 µm/3.0 mils SigmaFast 20 75 µm/3.0 mils SigmaFast 40 50 µm/2.0 mils SigmaFast 40 50 µm/2.0 mils







/3

STEEL PROTECTION

4041Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposureRecoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

SYSTEM

a three page issue September 2005 revision of October 2004



SPECIFICATION 1: recoatable epoxy polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair

compatible with alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint



pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination – intact areas; to be roughened – damaged and corroded areas; – steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils – galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils


note SigmaDur 520 can be replaced by SigmaDur 550

/3

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM

September 2005

SPECIFICATION 2: recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction


pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering

paint system SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) 75 µm/3.0 mils SigmaCover 456 75 µm/3.0 mils SigmaDur 520 50 µm/2.0 mils

notes – a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) – SigmaDur 520 can be replaced by SigmaDur 550

SPECIFICATION 3: recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction, especially suitable for in-shop application

pretreatment – Steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 – Shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2

paint system SigmaFast 205 75 µm/3.0 mils SigmaFast 205 75 µm/3.0 mils SigmaDur 550 50 µm/2.0 mils

notes – SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520

GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler.

/3

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM


SigmaCover 280 see product data sheet 7417 SigmaCover 456 see product data sheet 7466 SigmaCover 630 see product data sheet 7430 SigmaDur 520 see product data sheet 7524 SigmaDur 550 see product data sheet 7537 SigmaFast 205 see product data sheet 7802 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/3

STEEL PROTECTION

4042Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposureHigh solids epoxy/polyurethane system

a three page issue October 2004 revision of 7-2003


pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 µg per m³ air. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain.





pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination – damaged and corroded areas; – steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils – galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils


SYSTEM

/3

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM

October 2004

SPECIFICATION 2: surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium

pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning, complete removalof old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting


notes – galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630 – 2 primer coats applied by roller may be replaced by 1 coat of 150 µm/6 mils dft when applied by airless spray

SPECIFICATION 3: High solids epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction

pretreatment – steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 – shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2



The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler.

/3

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM

October 2004 REFERENCES





/3

STEEL PROTECTION

4045Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposureSolvent free epoxy/polyurethane system

SYSTEM

a three page issue September 2005 revision of December 2003



SPECIFICATION 1: surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair






note SigmaDur 580 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 or SigmaDur 550

/3

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM

September 2005

SPECIFICATION 2: surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium



notes SigmaDur 580 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 or SigmaDur 550

SPECIFICATION 3: Solvent free epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction



notes SigmaDur 580 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 or SigmaDur 550



/3

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM


SigmaCover 1500 see product data sheet 7715 SigmaDur 520 see product data sheet 7524 SigmaDur 550 see product data sheet 7537 SigmaDur 580 see product data sheet 7530 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

4046INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY/HIGH SOLIDS POLYURETHANE SYSTEM

SYSTEM

a two page issue June 2004 EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultra violet radiation and chemical

pollution will accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 µg per m³ air.

COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultra violet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre.

Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C4.

SPECIFICATION 1 waterborne high solids epoxy/polyurethane system with a fair resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals

pretreatment steel, weldseams and rusty areas; derusted to ISO-Sa2½ shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Ss or SPSS-Pt2

coating system Sigma aquacover 200 100 µm/4.0 mils Sigma aquacover 400 100 µm/4.0 mils Sigmadur 580 75 µm/3.0 mils

expected durability high (ISO-12944 part 5)



The life time of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the actual surface area. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. By giving more attention to these areas, the life time of the protective system will be extended. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: a bead with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with a sharp crest having a radius under 2 mm a grinder should be applied. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more.

/2

4046INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSUREWATERBORNE EPOXY/HIGH SOLIDS POLYURETHANE SYSTEM

SYSTEM

June 2004 REFERENCES

Sigma aquacover 400 see product data sheet 7871 Sigma aquacover 200 see product data sheet 7870 Sigmadur 580 see product data sheet 7530 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Specification for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491




/3

STEEL PROTECTION

4047Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposureSolvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane system

a three page issue March 2004 EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical


SPECIFICATION 1: surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair






/3

STEEL PROTECTION


March 2004

SPECIFICATION 2: surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane system for total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium



SPECIFICATION 3: Solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane system for new construction





/3

STEEL PROTECTION


March 2004 REFERENCES

SigmaCover 1500 see product data sheet 7715 SigmaDur 1800 see product data sheet 7725 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4050Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impactSolvent free flint reinforced epoxy system

SYSTEM

a two page issue September 2005 revision of July 2003


pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall-out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 µg per m³ air. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelarate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected.

GENERAL ASPECTS:

To obtain good performance it is essential that the old paint system should be completely removed. For maximum performance the surface should be abrasive blast cleaned to a suitable anchor pattern.

SPECIFICATION 1: solvent free, flint reinforced epoxy system with an excellent resistance to impact and abrasion suitable for total repair and new construction

suitable for steel (galvanised steel)

pretreatment steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 75-100 µm/3-4 mils

paint system SigmaShield 1090 3000 µm/120 mils

notes – SigmaShield 1090 can be applied on galvanised steel, but this will occur only occasionally – galvanised steel has to be sweepblasted with inert grit to obtain the required blasting profile

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4050Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impactSolvent free flint reinforced epoxy system

SYSTEM


The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by SigmaShield 1090. REFERENCES

SigmaShield 1090 see product data sheet 7490 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4051Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impactHigh solids glassflake reinforced epoxy system

SYSTEM



pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 µg per m³ air. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected.

GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential that the old paint system should be removed completely. For maximum performance the surface should be blast cleaned to a suitable anchor pattern.

SPECIFICATION 1: high solids glassflake reinforced epoxy system with an improved resistance to abrasion and impact suitable for total repair or new construction

suitable for steel (galvanised steel and aluminium)


paint system SigmaCover 280 75 µm/ 3.0 mils SigmaShield 460 400 µm/16.0 mils

note – in case of a complex structure we recommend to apply a dft of 2 x 200 µm (8 mils) – galvanised steel has to be sweepblasted with inert grit to obtain the required blasting profile

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4051Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impactHigh solids glassflake reinforced epoxy system

SYSTEM



SigmaCover 280 see product data sheet 7417 SigmaShield 460 see product data sheet 7952 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4060High temperature resistant alkyd paint systemTemperature up to 175°C / 350°F

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: High temperature surfaces: The surface temperature has more influence on

coating performance than surrounding atmospheric conditions. Thermal shock may be a consideration.

GENERAL ASPECTS:

To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system from defective areas and to blast clean or to obtain a profile by disc sanding using discs with rough abrasive.

SPECIFICATION 1: alkyd system for temperatures up to 175°C/350°F suitable for total repair or new construction


not on top of silicone and silicate paint

suitable for steel

not suitable for galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel

pretreatment removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2½ or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3

paint system Sigmarine 24 35 µm/1.4 mils SigmaTherm 175 25 µm/1.0 mils SigmaTherm 175 25 µm/1.0 mils SigmaTherm 175 25 µm/1.0 mils


In many cases some parts of the surface will not have been exposed to a really high temperature, because a temperature gradient across the surface existed. These parts may be in relatively good condition and can be recoated for cosmetic reasons with the last coat of the system, provided that contamination is removed and that the surface is sufficiently roughened. If the existing coats prove to be in a brittle condition, then they should be considered as damaged and removed completely.

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4060High temperature resistant alkyd paint systemTemperature up to 175°C / 350°F

SYSTEM


Sigmarine 24 see product data sheet 7135 SigmaTherm 175 see product data sheet 7260 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4061High temperature resistant silicate/acrylic paint system Temperature up to 350°C / 662°F

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: High temperature surfaces: The temperature aspect is usually of greater

importance than the general atmosphere. Thermal shock may need to be considered.

GENERAL ASPECTS:


SPECIFICATION 1: zinc silicate/silicone-acrylic system for temperatures up to 350°C / 662 °F suitable for total repair or new construction

compatible with silicate paint

not on top of alkyd, epoxy, silicone and polyurethane paint

suitable for steel


pretreatment removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2½ or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 using discs with rough abrasive

paint system SigmaZinc 158 75 µm/3.0 mils SigmaTherm 350 30 µm/1.2 mils



/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4061High temperature resistant silicate/acrylic paint system Temperature up to 350°C / 662°F

SYSTEM


SigmaTherm 350 see product data sheet 7565 SigmaZinc 158 see product data sheet 7558 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4062High temperature resistant epoxy systemTemperature up to 200°C / 390°F




GENERAL ASPECTS:


SPECIFICATION 1: epoxy system resistant to industrial pollution and temperatures up to 200°C/390°F suitable for total repair or new construction

compatible with alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane and silicate paint

not on top of silicone paint

suitable for steel, galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel

pretreatment – removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel or roughening of galvanised steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2½ or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 – to prevent contamination, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel should be painted as soon as possible, preferably within some hours of the metal spraying – contaminated metal sprayed steel should be high pressure water cleaned to remove contamination the surface must be dry before painting

paint system SigmaCover 435 60 µm/2.4 mils SigmaCover 435 60 µm/2.4 mils SigmaCover 435 60 µm/2.4 mils

note light shades may discolour above 130°C



SYSTEM

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4062High temperature resistant epoxy systemTemperature up to 200°C / 390°F

SYSTEM

October 2004

REFERENCES

SigmaCover 435 see product data sheet 7465 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4064High temperature resistant silicate systemTemperature up to 400°C / 750°F

SYSTEM




GENERAL ASPECTS:


SPECIFICATION 1: full silicate system for temperatures up to 400°C/750°F suitable for total repair or new construction

compatible with suitable silicate paint

not on top of alkyd, epoxy, silicone and polyurethane paint

suitable for steel


pretreatment – removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2½ or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 using discs with rough abrasive

paint system SigmaZinc 158 75 µm/3.0 mils SigmaTherm 520 40 µm/1.6 mils



/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4064High temperature resistant silicate systemTemperature up to 400°C / 750°F

SYSTEM


SigmaTherm 520 see product data sheet 7555 SigmaZinc 158 see product data sheet 7558 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4070Immersion in water or subsoil conditionsEpoxy tar system


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Immersion in water in conjunction with or without cathodic protection.

Subsoil and splashzone are also considered as immersion condition.

SPECIFICATION 1: epoxy tar maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 70°C/160°F

compatible with epoxy, epoxy tar and polyurethane paint

not on top of chlorinated rubber, vinyl and bitumen paint

pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination – intact areas; to be roughened – damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils

paint system SigmaCover 300 brown 125 µm/5.0 mils SigmaCover 300 black 125 µm/5.0 mils

notes – for health reasons this system should not be used for the storage of potable water for consumption – when cathodic protection or high temperatures are applied the pretreatment must be improved to ISO-Sa2½ or SSPS-Pt3 locally

SPECIFICATION 2: epoxy tar system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 70°C/160°F

pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2½ or SPSS-Pt3 locally


note – if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils may be used – when cathodic protection or high temperatures are applied the pretreatment must be improved to ISO-Sa2½ or SSPS-Pt3 locally

SYSTEM

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4070Immersion in water or subsoil conditionsEpoxy tar system

SYSTEM

October 2004

SPECIFICATION 3: epoxy tar system for new construction

pretreatment – steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2½ – steel with approved zinc silicate shopprimer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 or sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss – weldseams, burned and rusty areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½ or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3


note – if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils may be used – when cathodic protection or high temperatures are applied the pretreatment must be improved to ISO-Sa2½ or SSPS-Pt3 locally



REFERENCES

SigmaCover 280 see product data sheet 7417 SigmaCover 300 see product data sheet 7472 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance manual see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4071Immersion in water or subsoil conditionsSolvent free epoxy system

SYSTEM

a two page issue April 2009 revision of September 2005

EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Immersion in water in conjunction with or without cathodic protection.


SPECIFICATION 1: solvent free epoxy maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair, resistant to cathodic protection

compatible with epoxy-, polyurethane-, epoxy tar paint

not on top of chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, bitumen paint

pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination – intact areas; to be roughened – damaged and rusty areas; derusted to ISO-Sa2½ or SPSS-Pt3 locally – if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 can be used in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils

paint system SigmaGuard CSF 650 300 µm/12.0 mils

notes – if cathodic protection is applied SigmaCover 280 should be used – for the storage of potable water SigmaGuard CSF 585 should be used instead of SigmaGuard CSF 650 (see information sheet 1882) – for the storage of potable water local health regulations must also be observed with respect to primer and coating

SPECIFICATION 2: solvent free epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 50°C/120°F

pretreatment – after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2½ or SPSS-Pt3 (locally) – if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 may be used in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils

paint system SigmaGuard CSF 650 300 µm/12.0 mils

notes – if cathodic protection is applied SigmaCover 280 should be used – for the storage of potable water SigmaGuard CSF 585 should be used instead of SigmaGuard CSF 650 (see information sheet 1882) – for the storage of potable water local health regulations must also be observed with respect to primer and coating

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4071Immersion in water or subsoil conditionsSolvent free epoxy system

SYSTEM

April 2009

SPECIFICATION 3: solvent free phenolic epoxy system with improved resistance against abrasion for new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60°C/ 140 °F

pretreatment steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 µm/2-4 mils

paint system Novaguard 840 500 µm/20.0 mils

note if abrasion resistance is required Novaguard 840 can be replaced by SigmaShield 1200


The life time of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the actual surface area. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. By giving more attention to these areas, the life time of the maintenance system will be extended. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm a grinder should be applied. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES

Novaguard 840 see product data sheet 7768 SigmaCover 280 see product data sheet 7417 SigmaGuard CSF 650 see product data sheet 7443 SigmaGuard CSF 585 see product data sheet 7785 SigmaShield 1200 see product data sheet 7744 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Certificates for potable water see information sheet 1882 Tools for maintenance manual see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4072Immersion in water or subsoil conditionsHigh solids tar free epoxy system


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Immersion in water (in conjunction with or) without cathodic protection.


SPECIFICATION 1: high solids tar free epoxy maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60°C/140°F

compatible with epoxy, epoxy tar and polyurethane paint

not on top of chlorinated rubber, vinyl and bitumen paint

pretreatment – high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paintand contamination – intact areas; to be roughened – damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2½ or SPSS-Pt3 and primed with SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) in a dft of 125 µm/5 mils

paint system SigmaCover 805 150 µm/6.0 mils

note the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft

SPECIFICATION 2: high solids tar free epoxy system for total repair, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60°C/140°F

pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2½

paint system SigmaCover 805 (aluminium) 150 µm/6.0 mils SigmaCover 805 150 µm/6.0 mils

note – the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft – if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils can be used

SPECIFICATION 3: high solids tar free epoxy system for new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60°C/140°F

pretreatment steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2½

paint system SigmaCover 805 (aluminium) 150 µm/6.0 mils SigmaCover 805 150 µm/6.0 mils

note – the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft – if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils can be used

SYSTEM

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4072Immersion in water or subsoil conditions High solids tar free epoxy system

SYSTEM

October 2004 GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS:


SigmaCover 280 see product data sheet 7417 SigmaCover 630 see product data sheet 7430 SigmaCover 805 see product data sheet 7726 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance manual see information sheet 4007




/3

STEEL PROTECTION

4076Immersion in hot water Phenolic epoxy system - Mio epoxy system

SYSTEM

a three page issue April 2009 revision of September 2005

EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Non-saline water: hot water applicable to e.g. water tanks, storage

tanks and domestic water systems. Sea water: hot sea and other saline waters. GENERAL ASPECTS:

Protection against hot water by a coating system is in fact very critical. Only the combination of very good pretreatment, correct film thicknesses, good curing and optimal ventilation after application of the coating will give the desired protection against the influence of hot water. Good surface preparation is essential if good performance of hot water resistant systems is to be achieved. A pitted corroded surface, impurities in the protective coating or bad workmanship will result in failures. In service the steel substrate should have about the same temperature as the hot water itself in order to avoid blistering (as a result of the cold wall effect). Equipment, tank or vessel must therefore be sheltered against cold wind and/or insulated adequately to reduce heat transfer through the steel wall plus coating system. Application of the paints must be done very carefully, avoiding excess thickness, avoiding solvent trapping and maintaining good ventilation and curing conditions throughout the application process. (See sheet 1434). Forced curing by means of hot water of 60°C or by means of hot air will give definitely better results and is strongly recommended.

SPECIFICATION 1: phenolic epoxy system for a total repair or new construction resistant to hot water (100°C/210°F)

pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 µm/2-4 mils

paint system Phenguard 930 100 µm/4.0 mils Phenguard 935 100 µm/4.0 mils Phenguard 940 100 µm/4.0 mils

notes – to ensure optimal performance it is essential to check, prior to application, the cleaned surface on soluable salts the maximum acceptable level is 60 mg/m2 (12 µs/cm) – spot repair can be made using same system – existing coating around damages should be carefully feathered – the individual coats may not exceed 1,5 x the specified dft

/3

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM

April 2009

SPECIFICATION 2: mio epoxy system for a total repair or new construction resistant to hot water (100°C/210°F)

pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning, complete removalof old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel by means of blast cleaning to min. ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 40-75 µm/1.6-3.0 mils

paint system SigmaCover 522 80 µm/3.2 mils SigmaCover 522 80 µm/3.2 mils SigmaCover 522 80 µm/3.2 mils

notes – to ensure optimal performance it is essential to check, prior to application, the cleaned surface on soluable salts the maximum acceptable level is 60 mg/m2 (12 µs/cm) – spot repairs can be made using same system – existing coating around damages should be carefully feathered – the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft


The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding.

/3

STEEL PROTECTION


SYSTEM

April 2009 REFERENCES

Phenguard 930 see product data sheet 7409 Phenguard 935 see product data sheet 7435 Phenguard 940 see product data sheet 7436 SigmaCover 522 see product data sheet 7420 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance manual see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4081Immersion in chemicals Phenolic epoxy system

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Immersion in or splash of chemicals, acids and alkalies

Application areas: transport tanks, storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to a wide range of solvents, fatty acids, chemicals, monomers and water, including fresh water, hot water and foodstuffs. A full resistance list is available.

GENERAL ASPECTS:

To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. The chemical resistance will be determined by the existing coating system and the spot repair.

SPECIFICATION 1: phenolic epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals according to the tankcoating resistance list; for indications see also sheet 4009

pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to at least ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 µm/2-4 mils

paint system Phenguard 930 100 µm/4.0 mils Phenguard 935 100 µm/4.0 mils Phenguard 940 100 µm/4.0 mils

note the individual coats may not exceed 1,5 x the specified dft



/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4081Immersion in chemicals Phenolic epoxy system

SYSTEM

April 2009 REFERENCES

Phenguard 930 see product data sheet 7409 Phenguard 935 see product data sheet 7435 Phenguard 940 see product data sheet 7436 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4082Immersion in chemicals Solvent free epoxy system

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Immersion in or splash of chemicals, acids and alkalies.

Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and water.

GENERAL ASPECTS:

To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. The chemical resistance will be determined by the existing coating system and the spotrepair.

SPECIFICATION 1: solvent free phenolic epoxy system for new construction or total repair, resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals as indicated by data in sheet 4009

pretreatment – if an old paint system is present, high pressure water cleaning and complete removal – steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 µm/2-4 mils


note if a holding primer is required a suitable epoxy primer should be applied in a dft of 75 µm/3mils

SPECIFICATION 2: solvent free epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals as indicated by data in sheet 4009

pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 µm/2-4 mils

paint system Sigmaguard CSF 650 400 µm/16.0 mils

note if a holding primer is required a suitable epoxy primer should be applied in a dft of 75m/3mils

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4082Immersion in chemicals Solvent free epoxy system

SYSTEM

April 2009 GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding. REFERENCES

Novaguard 840 see product data sheet 7468 Sigmaguard CSF 650 see product data sheet 7443 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4083Immersion in chemicals Zinc ethyl silicate system

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Immersion in or splash of chemicals, specifically solvents.

Application areas: for storage tanks for aggressive solvents. The resistance to acidic or alkaline chemicals is limited due to the zinc pigment. A full resistance list is available.

GENERAL ASPECTS:

To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged

SPECIFICATION 1: zinc ethyl silicate system for a total repair or new construction; resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals according to the tankcoating resistance list, for indications see also sheet 4009

pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 µm/1.6-2.8 mils

paint system SigmaGuard 750 75 µm/3.0 mils



/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4083Immersion in chemicals Zinc ethyl silicate system

SYSTEM


SigmaGuard 750 see product data sheet 7551 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




STEEL PROTECTION

4090Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil High solids epoxy system

SYSTEM

a two page issue January 2008 revision of September 2005

EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Immersion in or splash of refined petroleum products and crude oil.

Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously exposed to aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and a limited range of solvents and chemicals. A full resistance list is available.

GENERAL ASPECTS:

To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully.

SPECIFICATION 1: high solids epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 70°C/160°F

pretreatment complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2½

paint system SigmaGuard 720 125 µm/5.0 mils SigmaGuard 720 125 µm/5.0 mils

note if a holding primer is required, a suitable primer (e.g. SigmaCover 522) should be applied in a dft of 50 µm/2 mils

SPECIFICATION 2: high solids epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 70°C/160°F


paint system SigmaGuard 730 150 µm/6.0 mils SigmaGuard 730 150 µm/6.0 mils

note if a holding primer is required, a suitable primer (e.g. SigmaCover 522) should be applied in a dft of 50 µm/2 mils

page 1/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4090Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oilHigh solids epoxy system

SYSTEM

January 2008 GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS:


SigmaCover 522 see product data sheet 7420 SigmaGuard 720 see product data sheet 7433 SigmaGuard 730 see product data sheet 7459 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007

Limitation of Liability - The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the Sigma Coatings products made by SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use.

SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise).


page 2/2

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4091Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil Epoxy tar system


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Immersion in crude oil or splash of crude oil or refined petroleum products.

Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to crude oil and (waste) water.

GENERAL ASPECTS:

To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coatings around damages should be feather edged carefully.

SPECIFICATION 1: epoxy tar system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for crude oil, resistant to temperatures up to 70°C/160°F

pretreatment complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2½ if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 can be applied in a dft of 75 µm/3 mils


note in contact with refined petroleum products leaching of coal tar can be expected



SYSTEM

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4091Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oilEpoxy tar system

SYSTEM


SigmaCover 280 see product data sheet 7417 SigmaCover 300 see product data sheet 7472 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4092Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil Solvent free epoxy system

SYSTEM


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Immersion in crude oil or splash of crude oil or refined petroleum products.

Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and a limited range of solvents and chemicals. A full resistance list is available.

GENERAL ASPECTS:

To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coatings around damages should be feather edged carefully.

SPECIFICATION 1: solvent free phenolic epoxy system for new construction or total repair, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 90°C/194°F

pretreatment – if an old paint system is present complete removal of the system is required after high pressure water cleaning – steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 µm/2-4 mils


notes – quality of the applied coating should be checked on pinholes and holidays and repaired according to this specification – to fill pittings a scrapelayer of Novaguard 840 could be applied – more detailed information with regards to protection of tank bottoms can be found in separate manual

SPECIFICATION 2: solvent free epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 60°C/140°F

pretreatment after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 µm/2-4 mils

paint system SigmaCover 522 50 µm/ 2.0 mils Sigmaguard CSF 650 400 µm/16.0 mils

notes – quality of the applied coating should be checked on pinholes and holidays and repaired according to this specification – to fill pittings a scrapelayer of Sigmaguard CSF 650 could be applied

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4092Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oilSolvent free epoxy system

SYSTEM

April 2009


The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by a scrapelayer of the solvent free epoxy of the coating system (Novaguard 840 or Sigmaguard CSF 650). REFERENCES

Novaguard 840 see product data sheet 7468 SigmaCover 522 see product data sheet 7420 Sigmaguard CSF 650 see product data sheet 7443 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4101Immersion in waste water and slurryEpoxy tar system


EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Applicable to river installations, sewage-treatment tanks, water tanks and

domestic water systems, and where abrasion can be expected. GENERAL ASPECTS:

To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully.

SPECIFICATION 1: epoxy tar system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for waste water and mud

pretreatment complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2½ if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 can be applied in a dft of 50 µm/2 mils


note to prevent severe pitting when exposed to acidic water the quality of the coating system should be checked on pinholes and holidays and repaired according to this specification



SYSTEM

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4101Immersion in waste water and slurryEpoxy tar system

SYSTEM






/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4102Immersion in waste water and slurryHigh solids tar free epoxy system





SPECIFICATION 1: high solids epoxy tar free system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for waste water and mud


paint system SigmaCover 805 150 µm/6.0 mils SigmaCover 805 150 µm/6.0 mils

note – the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft – if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 75 µm/3.0 mils can be used



SYSTEM

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4102Immersion in waste water and slurryHigh solids tar free epoxy system

SYSTEM






/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4103Immersion in waste water and slurrySolvent free phenolic epoxy system

SYSTEM





SPECIFICATION 1: Solvent free phenolic epoxy system with improved resistance against abrasion for a total repair or new construction, suitable for waste water and mud

pretreatment complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2½, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 µm/2-4 mils

paint system SigmaShield 1200 500 µm/20.0 mils



/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4103Immersion in waste water and slurrySolvent free phenolic epoxy system

SYSTEM


SigmaShield 1200 see product data sheet 7744 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4113System for special conditionsZinc epoxy primed steel

SYSTEM




GENERAL ASPECTS:

Due to its good anticorrosive properties, zinc epoxy primers are often specified for new fabrication. However, in maintenance coating systems zinc epoxy primers cannot be applied on top of existing organic coatings, because of lack of adhesion. Nevertheless as a result of the good experience with the new fabrication coating system it is often decided to start the maintenance coating system again with a zinc epoxy primer. In that case a full reblast of the substrate is necessary. If a full reblast is impossible other recommendations for maintenance are given in sheets 4041-4042.

SPECIFICATION 1: high solids system for a total repair or new construction, using a zinc epoxy primer, followed by an epoxy build coat


paint system SigmaZinc 102 HS 60 µm/2.4 mils SigmaCover 805 150 µm/6.0 mils

note if gloss retention is required, see specification 2

SPECIFICATION 2: high solids system for a total repair or new construction, using a zinc epoxy primer, followed by an epoxy build coat and finished with a recoatable polyurethane finish


paint system SigmaZinc 102 HS 60 µm/2.4 mils SigmaCover 805 150 µm/6.0 mils SigmaDur 580 75 µm/3.0 mils

/2

STEEL PROTECTION

4113System for special conditionsZinc epoxy primed steel

SYSTEM


The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding. REFERENCES

SigmaCover 805 see product data sheet 7726 SigmaDur 580 see product data sheet 7530 SigmaZinc 102 HS see product data sheet 7702 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 Tools for maintenance management see information sheet 4007




/4

1410 CONVERSION TABLES

INFORMATION

a four page issue June 2002 revision of 10-1999

GENERAL

1 atmosphere = 14.223 lb/sq.in. 1 foot = 0.305 metre 1 Imp. gallon = 4.546 litres 1 litre = 0.220 Imp. gallon 1 litre = 0.264 US gallon 1 metre = 3.281 feet 1 sq. foot = 0.093 sq. metre 1 sq. metre = 10.765 sq. feet 1 US gallon = 3.785 litres 1 yard = 0.915 metre 1 metre = 1.0936 yard degree C = 5/9 x (degree F - 32) degree F = 9/5 x degree C + 32

PRESSURE

(kg/cm²) (p.s.i.) (kg/cm²) (p.s.i.) atmosphere lb/sq.in. atmosphere lb/sq.in. (bar) (bar) 100 1420 1 14.2 110 1560 2 28.4 120 1710 3 42.7 130 1850 4 56.9 140 1990 5 71.1 150 2130 6 85.3 160 2280 7 99.6 170 2420 8 113.8 180 2560 9 128.0 190 2700 10 142.2 200 2840

VOLUME

1 Imperial gallon = 4.55 litre = 1.2 US gallons 1 litre = 0.22 Imperial gallon = 0.26 US gallon 1 US gallon = 3.79 litre = 0.83 Imperial gallon

litres Imperial US gallons gallons

1 0.22 0.26 2 0.44 0.53 3 0.66 0.79 4 0.88 1.06 5 1.10 1.32 6 1.32 1.58 7 1.54 1.85 8 1.76 2.11 9 1.98 2.38 10 2.20 2.64 15 3.30 3.96 20 4.40 5.28 50 11.00 13.21 100 22.00 26.42

DRY FILM THICKNESS

mi- mi- mi- mi- crons crons crons crons (µm) mils (µm) mils (µm) mils (µm) mils

8 0.3 105 4.2 205 8.2 305 12.2 10 0.4 110 4.4 210 8.4 310 12.4 15 0.6 115 4.6 215 8.6 315 12.6 20 0.8 120 4.8 220 8.8 320 12.8 25 1.0 125 5.0 225 9.0 325 13.0 30 1.2 130 5.2 230 9.2 330 13.2 35 1.4 135 5.4 235 9.4 335 13.4 40 1.6 140 5.6 240 9.6 340 13.6 45 1.8 145 5.8 245 9.8 345 13.8 50 2.0 150 6.0 250 10.0 350 14.0 55 2.2 155 6.2 255 10.2 355 14.2 60 2.4 160 6.4 260 10.4 360 14.4 65 2.6 165 6.6 265 10.6 365 14.6 70 2.8 170 6.8 270 10.8 370 14.8 75 3.0 175 7.0 275 11.0 375 15.0 80 3.2 180 7.2 280 11.2 380 15.2 85 3.4 185 7.4 285 11.4 385 15.4 90 3.6 190 7.6 290 11.6 390 15.6 95 3.8 195 7.8 295 11.8 395 15.8 100 4.0 200 8.0 300 12.0 400 16.0

/4


INFORMATION

June 2002

SPREADING RATE

Sq.m./l Sq.ft./ sq.ft./ Sq.m./l Sq.ft./ sq.ft./ Sq.m./l Sq.ft./ sq.ft./ Imp.gal US gal Imp.gal US gal Imp.gal US gal

1.0 49 41 5.0 244 203 9.0 440 366 1.1 54 45 5.1 249 208 9.1 445 370 1.2 59 49 5.2 254 212 9.2 450 374 1.3 64 53 5.3 259 216 9.3 455 378 1.4 68 57 5.4 264 220 9.4 460 383 1.5 73 61 5.5 269 224 9.5 464 387 1.6 78 65 5.6 274 228 9.6 469 391 1.7 83 69 5.7 279 232 9.7 474 395 1.8 88 73 5.8 284 236 9.8 479 399 1.9 93 77 5.9 288 240 9.9 484 403 2.0 98 81 6.0 293 244 10.0 490 405 2.1 103 85 6.1 298 248 10.5 515 425 2.2 108 89 6.2 303 252 11.0 540 450 2.3 112 94 6.3 308 256 11.5 560 470 2.4 117 98 6.4 313 260 12.0 585 490 2.5 122 102 6.5 318 265 12.5 610 510 2.6 127 106 6.6 323 269 13.0 635 530 2.7 132 110 6.7 328 273 13.5 660 550 2.8 137 114 6.8 332 277 14.0 685 570 2.9 142 118 6.9 337 281 14.5 710 590 3.0 147 122 7.0 342 285 15.0 735 610 3.1 152 126 7.1 347 289 15.5 760 630 3.2 156 130 7.2 352 293 16.0 780 650 3.3 161 134 7.3 357 297 16.5 805 670 3.4 166 138 7.4 362 301 17.0 830 690 3.5 171 142 7.5 367 305 17.5 855 710 3.6 176 146 7.6 372 309 18.0 880 735 3.7 181 151 7.7 376 313 18.5 905 755 3.8 186 155 7.8 381 317 19.0 930 775 3.9 191 159 7.9 386 321 19.5 955 795 4.0 196 163 8.0 391 325 20.0 980 815 4.1 200 167 8.1 396 330 20.5 1000 835 4.2 205 171 8.2 401 334 21.0 1025 855 4.3 210 175 8.3 406 338 21.5 1050 875 4.4 215 179 8.4 411 342 22.0 1075 895 4.5 220 183 8.5 416 346 22.5 1100 915 4.6 225 187 8.6 420 350 23.0 1125 935 4.7 230 191 8.7 425 354 23.5 1150 955 4.8 235 195 8.8 430 358 24.0 1175 975 4.9 240 199 8.9 435 362 24.5 1200 995

/4


INFORMATION

June 2002

VISCOSITY IN SECONDS

DIN Ford Afnor B.S. DIN Ford Afnor B.S. cup 4 cup 4 coupe 4 cup 4 cup 4 cup 4 coupe 4 cup 4

15 15 17 19 44 53 56 60 16 17 18 20 46 55 59 63 17 18 20 22 48 58 62 66 18 19 21 23 50 60 64 69 19 21 23 25 55 67 71 75 20 22 24 26 60 73 78 82 21 23 25 28 65 79 84 89 22 25 27 29 70 86 91 96 23 26 28 31 75 92 97 105 24 28 30 32 80 98 104 109 25 29 31 33 85 104 110 116 26 30 32 34 90 111 117 123 27 31 34 36 95 117 124 130 28 33 35 37 100 123 130 138 29 34 36 38 110 136 144 152 30 35 38 40 120 148 157 166 32 38 40 43 130 160 171 180 34 40 43 46 140 173 184 194 36 43 46 49 150 185 197 207 38 45 48 52 160 198 210 221 40 48 51 54 170 210 224 235 42 51 54 57 180 223 237 249

/4


INFORMATION

June 2002

TEMPERATURE °C = ( °F - 32 ) x 5/9

°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F

–10 14.0 8 46.4 32 90 95 203 – 9 15.8 9 48.2 34 93 100 212 – 8 17.6 10 50.0 36 97 110 230 – 7 19.4 11 51.8 38 100 120 248 – 6 21.2 12 53.6 40 104 130 266 – 5 23.0 13 55.4 42 108 140 284 – 4 24.8 14 57.2 44 111 150 302 – 3 26.6 15 59.0 46 115 160 320 – 2 28.4 16 60.8 48 118 170 338 – 1 30.2 17 62.6 50 122 180 356 0 32.0 18 64.4 55 131 190 374 1 33.8 19 66.2 60 140 200 392 2 35.6 20 68.0 65 149 250 482 3 37.4 22 72.0 70 158 300 572 4 39.2 24 75.0 75 167 350 662 5 41.0 26 79.0 80 176 400 752 6 42.8 28 82.0 85 185 450 842 7 44.6 30 86.0 90 194 500 932




/9

1411 EXPLANATION TO PRODUCT DATA SHEETS

INFORMATION

an nine page issue October 2010 revision of April 2010

GENERAL For ease of reference figures are usually stated in one unit only. Equivalents are given in the conversion tables. See sheets 1410 Conversion tables, 1412 Nomograph conversion from english units to metric units and 1413 S.I. units. All values are given for temperature of 20°C (68°F) and relative humidity of 70%, unless stated otherwise.

GLOSS With a ‘Lange’ gloss gauge 5 ranges of gloss have been determined, compared with a standard sheet of black polished glass. The gloss values are determined on Lange gloss gauge (angle 60°) according to ISO 2813 (= ASTM D-523). The expressions used in the data sheets are: Flat corresponds with 0- 15% Eggshell corresponds with 15- 30% Semi-gloss corresponds with 30- 60% Gloss corresponds with 60- 80% High-gloss corresponds with 80-100% (at 20° angle above 70%)

In practice, the level of gloss and surface finish will be dependent upon a number of factors, including application and the condition of the surface to be overcoated.

COLOUR For products supplied in different colours three colour quality levels exist:

1. Good For finishes in general, especially based on polyurethane, this quality matches the colour standard

2. Approximate For undercoats and low gloss topcoats in general, this quality level is close to the colour standard

3. Best Match For primers in general, this quality level is near to the colour standard

MICACEOUS IRON OXIDE AND/OR ALUMINIUM CONTAINING PAINTS Micaceous iron oxide and/or aluminium containing paints show different appearance and colour impression depending on thickness and application method. A touch-up by brushing may be visible on a sprayed area.

SHELF LIFE The period from the date of manufacture during which the paint can be transported and stored in undamaged and unopened packing at temperatures between 5-35°C, without any influence on the application or performance of the paint. After exceeding this period the paint is subject to reinspection. Water-borne products must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport.

/9


INFORMATION

SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS & TEMPERATURES In order to achieve optimal application results, the technical requirements as stated in the relevant product data sheets should be followed. It is recommended that during the application and initial curing, the substrate temperature does not exceed 40° C, unless otherwise stated in the relevant PDS. However, maintaining the required conditions in practice might prove difficult, and the substrate temperature may occasionally exceed the recommended limits. In such cases special care must be taken to ensure proper substrate wetting and film formation, avoid excessive over spray, dry spray, sagging and other application related coating defects. Precautions such as additional thinning of the coating, providing suitable sun/heat protection and/or forced ventilation might be adequate. However, maintaining the recommended application conditions will facilitate optimal application results. For further details regarding substrate conditions and temperatures refer to: Information Sheet 1490 – Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Information Sheet 1650 – Relative Humidity / Substrate Temperature / Air Temperature

/9


INFORMATION

October 2010

FULL CURE ‘Full cure’ means, that the properties of a paint as described in the product data sheet are achieved (suitable for service). However, in case of dry bulk carriage an extra curing time may be required before the coating has reached its full mechanical strength and is suitable for carriage of hard angular cargoes

FLASH POINT For paints the flash point is determined according to ISO 1523 (= ASTM D-3278, corresponding to Sigma method SM 311-41) or calculated. For thinners the flash point is determined according to DIN 51755 (corresponding to Sigma method SM 311-42) or calculated. Please always refer to the latest Material Safety Data Sheet for the paint and thinners.

OVERCOATING TABLE The data given is a fair indication for normal conditions, longer drying times are necessary at lower temperatures and under unfavourable weather and/or ventilation conditions and higher dry film thicknesses.

For epoxy coatings the minimum curing time for the recommended dft is given in the data sheets. For average dfts 50% higher, the minimum overcoating time should be multiplied by 1,5 and for average dfts 100% higher the multiplication factor is 2,5. Recoating data are based on atmospheric exposure, for other exposure conditions contact your nearest sales office.

TOUCH DRY The touch dry time corresponds with the tack free time measured in accordance with ASTM D-1640 (corresponding with Sigma method SM 315-01). The touch dry time will be influenced by dft, ventilation conditions and substrate temperature.

DRY TO HANDLE The dry to handle time corresponds with the dry-through time measured in accordance with ASTM D-1640 (corresponding with Sigma method SM 315-01) and indicates the time when walking over is possible. The dry-to-handle time will be influenced by dft, ventilation conditions and substrate temperature and should not be necessarily interpreted as ready for transportation due to the likelihood of excessive damage.

DRY FILM THICKNESS (dft) / WET FILM THICKNESS (wft) The dry film thickness can be calculated from the applied wet film thickness:

dft = wft x % volume solids wft = dft x 100 100 % volume solids Recommended dft The dry film thickness for a paint system indicated in our system sheets is the recommended dft for the specific exposure conditions and based on airless spray application.

Dft specifications referred to herein are valid for the coatings and coating systems in this manual unless mentioned otherwise in the respective product and system sheets.

/9


INFORMATION

October 2010

Minimum dft for application The minimum dft of a paint system (also a one coat system) should follow the 90/10 rule (e.g. 90% of the recommended dft is acceptable for up to 10% of the readings only), whilst for individual coats the minimum dft should not be lower than 80% of the recommended dft, and must form a closed film.

Maximum dft for application - General Application of a paint at thicknesses in excess of the dft recommended on the product data sheet may result in performance problems. Such problems include solvent retention and a reduction in cohesive strength in association with certain types of topcoat.

In a coating system, the dft of a primer is of the utmost importance. In general, Sigma Coatings would restrict the dft of any primer to 1.5 times that specified on the product data sheet. For a coating system, including the individual coats (except the primer), the maximum dft is 2 times the recommended dft, whereas for the critical areas of a painted structure, 10% of the readings can be between 2 and 2.2 times the recommended dft. Critical areas are e.g. weld seams, edges, bolts, corners, nuts and areas of difficult access.

For coating specifications requiring coating thicknesses which exceed the recommended dfts as mentioned in the product and system sheets, the maximum dft allowed should be established per project prior to start-up.

Over-application and its consequences is a complex subject and is dependent on the generic type of system, recommended dft and number of coats, as well as the intended exposure.

Please refer to your local Sigma Coatings office if you should have any questions on this important issue.

The life time of any protective coating system is also determined by the dry film thickness applied to critical areas. The dft of all of these critical areas should be closely monitored and controlled by the application of stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system (or as recommended otherwise by Sigma Coatings). Please note that if a solvented coating has been applied over the specified dft then the minimum overcoating time must be increased to ensure that sufficient time is given for solvent evaporation. Care must also be taken to avoid over-application on critical areas during the progress of the job. Over-application does not lead to enhanced performance life time of the coating system.

Maximum dft for application - Linings For linings for severe exposure conditions or reinforced solvent free systems, the dft of the primer and the subsequent coatings can be more critical. Dft limitations are detailed in the respective system / product data sheets.

/9


INFORMATION

October 2010

VOC Until further notice, the heavy duty Marine and PC coatings industries in Europe must comply with the VOC Directive 1999/13/EC (SED).

VOC values (in g/kg) to assist with the annual calculation of the solvent limits related to the SED requirements, are mentioned on each Product Datasheet as well as on the label of all products.

For decorative, functional and protective coatings used in ‘buildings,’ the VOC Directive 2004/42/EC applies. This is based on compliant coatings.

Label Example:

1999/13/EC : 320 g/kg 2004/42/IIa (i) 600 (2007) 360

Explanation Label Example:

1999/13/EC : 320 g/kg Max VOC according to Directive 1999/13/EC for material in the can. 2004/42/IIa (i) Reference to the sub-category according to Directive 2004/42/IIa 600 (2007) Threshold limit for sub-category according to Directive 2004/42/IIa from

1.1.2007 till 1.1.2010 360 The max content of VOC in g/l of the product in a ready to use condition

(including maximum amount of thinner according to Product Datasheet).

SOLIDS CONTENT BY VOLUME This value is given in the product data sheet. It can be determined by a laboratory test, Sigma Method 314-10 corresponding to ISO method 3233 or calculated from the formulation. The calculated theoretical solids content by volume is in general lower than the determined solids content by volume. The latter approximates best to practice, assuming that the table for spreading rate losses is used correctly. Diluents with a high boiling point and low vapour pressure are widely used in solvent free coatings, they will remain in the cured film under normal ambient conditions and will therefore have negligible effect on the volume solids of these specific products. Furthermore, due to the relative high boiling point and rather low vapor pressure of these diluents, the ventilation requirements when using solvent free coatings in confined spaces to maintain the internal atmosphere at 10% of the Lower Explosion Limit, will be unchanged.

TOLERANCES Values given for specific gravity, theoretical spreading rate and solids content are averages from standard production batches; these values can vary slightly, also for colours of one product.

/9


INFORMATION

October 2010

VENTILATION Adequate ventilation during application and curing of the coating is not only required for health and safety reasons but also to ensure that the coating gives optimal performance.

Stagnant air/high vapour concentrations in confined spaces must be avoided. Forced ventilation will help to avoid high vapour concentrations and possible solvent entrapment in the coating which may produce a temporary plasticising effect. Ventilation with cold, humid air in the drying stage should be avoided. Also avoid ventilation with heated air during the wet film forming stage as this approach may give skinning and increased solvent entrapment.

For more information, see the following data sheets: 1430 Safety indications 1431 Safety in confined spaces and health safety, explosion hazard - toxic hazard 1434 Directives for ventilation practice

THEORETICAL SPREADING RATE The theoretical spreading rate m²/l for a given dry film thickness can be calculated from:

m²/l = % volume solids x 10 dry film thickness (in µm)

PRACTICAL SPREADING RATE The practical spreading rate depends on a number of factors: surface condition and profile, application method, normal, high build or solvent-free paint, skill of labour and weather conditions. It is often estimated at about 70 % of the theoretical spreading rate but under many conditions this is still far too high. For calculation purposes the following table has been composed in which spreading rate LOSSES are compiled. Substrates like wood and concrete are not included because they present too many other variable factors, especially in the preparation, the filling of pores, etc.

RECOMMENDED THINNERS This product must only be thinned using the recommended Sigma thinners. The use of alternative thinners, particularly these containing alcohols, can severely inhibit the curing mechanism of certain coating types and will influence the performance. In case of the use of other thinners than advised, Sigma Coatings will not accept any responsibility.

/9


INFORMATION

October 2010

ESTIMATED LOSSES IN PERCENTAGES ALL FIGURES ± 10 DEPENDING ON CIRCUMSTANCES (AS GUIDE ONLY)

BARE STEEL/FIRST COAT 4) COATED STEEL/NEXT COAT

NEW OLD NEW OLD Type of surface and blast-cleaned derusted including due for application method A-B-C C St 3 / D shop primer maintenance ISO-Sa2½ ISO-Sa2½

inside outside inside outside inside outside inside outside

LARGE 1) airless spray 30 40 40 50 25 35 35 45 air-spray 40 50 50 60 35 45 45 55 roller 35 35 40 40 30 30 40 40

SMALL 2) airless spray 45 55 55 65 40 50 50 60 air-spray 50 60 65 65 45 55 60 60 roller-brush 25 25 25 30 20 20 30 30

FRAME- airless spray 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 WORK 3) brush 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30

1) LARGE SURFACES : hull, decks, deckhouses, tanks, holds 2) SMALL SURFACES : masts, water ways, machinery, structural steel and complex structures 3) FRAMEWORK : ladders, piping and railings 4) PRIMERS : consumption of first coat is always higher than for subsequent coats because of the steel profile

Estimation of volume of paint necessary for a paint job can be calculated from:

10 x A x DFT = Q VS x (100-W) EXAMPLE

Q = quantity in litre Q = to be calculated A = area in m² A = 1000 m² DFT = dry film thickness DFT = 100 µm VS = % volume solids (see data sheet) VS = 50% W = estimated losses (see table) W = 40%

Q = 10 x 1000 x 100 = 333 ltr. 50 x (100-40)

/9


INFORMATION

october 2010

NOZZLE ORIFICE AND SPRAY ANGLE In the product data sheets only the recommended orifice is stated. The choice of the spray angle depends very much on the practical situation. The table below compares orifice and angle with the corresponding codes of various manufacturers. Please consult other manufacturers for their corresponding codes.

ORIFICE WIWA - Spray Tips 1) GRACO - Spray Tips 2)

Inches mm's Angle Contractor Finish

0,007 0.18 40° 018/40 -- 163-407

0,009 0.23 40° 023/40 -- 163-409 0,009 0.23 65° -- -- 163-609

0,011 0.28 25° 028/25 269-211 163-211 0,011 0.28 40° 028/40 269-411 163-411 0,011 0.28 65° 028/65 -- 163-611

0,013 0.33 25° 033/25 269-213 163-213 0,013 0.33 50° 033/50 269-513 163-513 0,013 0.33 65° 033/65 269-613 163-613 0,013 0.33 80° 033/80 -- 163-813

0,015 0.38 40° 038/40 269-415 163-415 0,015 0.38 65° 038/65 269-615 163-615 0,015 0.38 80° -- 269-815 163-815

0,018 0.46 65° 046/65 -- 163-618 0,018 0.46 80° -- -- 163-818

0,021 0.53 65° 053/65 269-621 163-621 0,021 0.53 80° -- 269-821 163-821

0,026 0.66 40° 066/40 -- 163-426 0,026 0.66 65° 066/65 -- 163-626 0,026 0.66 95° -- -- 163-926

0,036 0.91 40° 091/40 -- -- 0,036 0.91 80° 091/80 -- --

1) In the WIWA number the relation between orifice and angle is clear

2) Orifice Size determines how many liters per minute can be atomized through the airless spray tip. The last two digits of the part number tell the Orifice Size in thousandths of an inch. In this example, the orifice is 0.381 mm (015"). For ordering use the complete number.

Orifice Orifice

Tip No. 163-415 or Tip No. 269-415

Spray Width Spray Width

Spray Width is based on spraying distance 305 mm (12") from the surface. Double the fourth digit of the tip part number to determine the approximate minimum Spray Width in inches. Add two inches to that number for maximum width. In this example, this tip size produces a 203-254 mm (8-10") spray pattern (width) at 305 mm (12") distance from the surface.

/9


INFORMATION

October 2010

MIXING RATIO - twin-feed products The mix ratios in volume for twin-feed applied products should be retrieved from specific data sheets. It is very important that right ratios are maintained but deviations up to max. 3% are acceptable unless otherwise stated on specific data sheets. These products are generally supplied ready for use after mixing of components as extra diluting is not allowed.

INDUCTION TIME If mentioned on the product data sheet the coating should be thoroughly mixed and left for the recommended time for the particular temperature conditions at application. This induction time or pre-curing of the product ensures that the coating will give the required performance and application properties.

POT LIFE This gives the time interval after mixing of the components of the coating during which the material can be applied, without change of application and performance properties of the coating. For solvent containing coatings an extra addition of thinner up to 5% is allowed. For solvent free coatings addition of thinner is not permitted. For solvent free and high solid coatings an exothermic reaction occurs, resulting in gelation shortly after reaching the end of the pot life. It is important to clean equipment with the recommended cleaning thinner before the pot life has expired and/or directly after completion of application of the paint.




/3

1430 SAFETY INDICATIONS

INFORMATION

a three page issue October 1999 revision of 1-1995

Most paints contain flammable solvents and some contain materials which can harm the skin, or damage the health if swallowed or inhaled. Whilst most countries have developed regulations to control labelling, storage and use of toxic or hazardous material as yet there is no agreed international code or system. Sigma Coatings will adopt the local requirements in any country where their products are sold, but since it is quite impossible and even confusing to apply all the marks which could be required for every country, a Sigma Coatings system has been developed which is standard for our products throughout the world. We will then add local regulation markings in addition, if required. Two major classes of risk must be controlled and precautions defined which will reduce the risk to acceptable levels: A) Health risks, these include: –

1. Gases or vapours. These could include solvent evaporation during the drying period, or perhaps formed during heating of the painted object.

2. Liquids in the paint. These might be solvents, or perhaps binders, which may be toxic if swallowed or inhaled as spray droplets, or dermatitic or toxic in contact with the skin.

3. Powders or dusts. These can be formed during heating painted objects (e.g. flame cutting or welding painted steel), or be present in powder formed during sanding operations, or in spray mist.

B) Fire or explosion risks, these include: –

1. Fire risk during storage or transport. Most paints other than water based products can be ignited and will support flame.

2. Explosion hazard during application. Flammable solvents in mixture with oxygen in air can explode within certain concentration limits if ignited or detonated.

The following sentences are used to define the classes of hazard and this data sheet gives details of precautions which should be taken in each case.

/3


INFORMATION

October 1999 Relatively harmless paint Normal measures which are always applicable are:

– Wash hands regularly and thoroughly with warm water/soap. – Immediately cover any wound or cut. – Do not roll cigarettes, smoke, or eat with dirty hands. – Beware of possible dust or fumes resulting from sand papering or burning. – Check carefully that there is no possible fire or explosion risk. – Check whether extra ventilation is required.

Highly flammable paint. Flash point of paints and solvents is stated in all our product data sheets. Flash point up to and This is the lowest temperature at which a mixture of the material with air including 23°C (DIN 53213). can ignite or explode. If the temperature of the air is near, or above, the

flash point it is essential that sufficient ventilation air is provided to reduce the concentration of solvent well below the lower explosive limit (L.E.L.). Mixtures of solvent and air can only explode when the concentration lies between the lower and upper explosive limits. These limits vary from one solvent to another but the LEL is usually about 50 g per 1 m³ of air. This is described in detail in sheet 1431. In brief 200 m³ ventilation air is required per kilo of solvent to maintain an atmosphere below 10% of LEL. Such a mixture is safe even at temperatures above the flash point.

Gloves recommended Solvents and other components in some paints can irritate the skin, and

although in normal paints this may only be a minor and temporary irritation, Paint which irritates or dermatitis of sensitive skins can be caused by solvents or chemicals in affects skin or mucous some paints. These are indicated by this ‘glove’ sentence. Barrier creams membranes. together with gloves, goggles and possibly face masks should be used.

In all cases, however, the habit of using solvents to clean the skin after painting should be discouraged. Contact of paint with the skin should be avoided by use of barrier creams and protective gloves. Any paint on the skin should be removed at once with skin cleaning liquids or jellies and then washed with water.

Mask recommended Dust, smoke and spray mist can be filtered by face masks containing a dust

filter cartridge. Cartridges are also available which absorb both dust and Inhalation of dust and solvents. These are only effective whilst there is no apparent smell of spraymist is harmful. solvent. The filter is exhausted when the odour of solvent can be detected

and the filter should then be changed. It is most important that the correct filter for the class of work should be used. These are described by the manufacturers of the face mask and filter.

/3


INFORMATION

October 1999 Fresh Air Mask recommended Toxic substances in paints usually enter the body by inhalation of gases,

vapours, fumes, dusts or spray mists. An indication of the level of hazard is Inhalation of vapour and the Threshold Limits Value (T.L.V.), at one time called Maximum Allowable dust is harmful. Concentration (M.A.C.). This is the concentration which can be tolerated by

a healthy worker for 8 hours a day without adverse effects. The lower the figure, the more toxic the substance. The concentrations are given either as parts per million (ppm), i.e. cm³ of vapour per m³ of air, or for solid dusts as mg per m³. The minimum volume for air required to achieve this safe level of concentration will be given in our data sheets. This volume may in some cases be as much as 20 times that required to reach 10% of LEL and in some classes of work it may be impractical to supply the volume of air required to allow the required rate of usage of paint in the compartment. In such cases it is essential that operators are supplied with, and required to use, fresh air masks or respirators fed with clean air at positive pressure. It is important that the mask has a good facial fit. See also sheet 1431.

Paint contains heavy toxic Keep skin covered as far as possible, wear gloves and protect the eyes. substances and is dangerous. Avoid contamination of the skin. Provide very good ventilation and wear

fresh air mask. Change all overclothes and shoes immediately after finishing the work. Keep dirty cloths and other objects separate, destroy or clean contaminated clothes with care. Wash the hands very thoroughly. Handle empty containers with care and avoid contamination of the environment with any poisonous paint or waste.

THE SIGMA WARNING SYSTEM will show one, or a combination of more than one, of the described sentences. The safety code required in each country will be added to drums used in that country.




/5

1431SAFETY IN CONFINED SPACES AND HEALTH SAFETY EXPLOSION HAZARD - TOXIC HAZARD

INFORMATION

a five page issue October 1999 revision of 1-1995

When paints containing solvents are applied in enclosed or confined spaces, two hazards can exist, explosion and toxicity and precautions must be taken to eliminate them. General aspects of explosion hazards

The nature of this hazard is explained in detail below. The essential precaution to be taken is that sufficient ventilation air must be provided to maintain the ratio of vapour/air at no more than 10% of the lower explosive limit. The method for calculation is given below and data on minimum ventilation air quantity is given in product data sheets. If the flash point of the solvent is above the working temperature, then an explosion cannot occur. However, it may still be necessary to ventilate to provide a clean working atmosphere or to eliminate toxic hazard.

An explosion is simply very rapid burning of a flammable mixture (in the case of paint, it is the burning of solvent vapour in oxygen contained in the air). The speed of combustion is so great that there is extremely rapid development of heat and pressure (6 to 9 times the original pressure). This can lead to destruction of the compartment and injury to work people. Three factors must be present to create an explosion. a. The mixture of vapour and air must be between the lower explosive limit (LEL) and the upper explosive

limit. b. The mixture must be at a temperature above the flash point temperature of the vapour. c. A source of ignition with high enough temperature and energy must be present to initiate the explosion

reaction. These three factors explain the reasons for the safety precautions. Ventilation to provide an atmosphere below LEL

It is usual to specify that ventilation should be provided to reduce vapour concentration to less than 10% of LEL. This large safety margin is required to allow for variations in ventilation in all parts of a compartment.

The minimum ventilation air in m³ per minute may be calculated from the formula: (P x A) + (Q x B) t

Calculation

P = volume of paint applied in the compartment in litres during time t minutes. Q = volume of added solvent used in the paint applied in the compartment in litres in time t minutes. A = ventilation air quantity for 1 litre of paint to reach 10% LEL. B = ventilation air quantity for 1 litre of solvent to reach 10% LEL. t = time of application in minutes of volume P of paint.

/5

1431SAFETY IN CONFINED SPACES AND HEALTH SAFETYEXPLOSION HAZARD - TOXIC HAZARD

INFORMATION

October 1999 Example

100 litres of paint (P) plus 5 litres of thinner (Q) are used within 45 minutes (t). Value A is e.g. 60 m³ (given in product data sheet). Value B is e.g. 130 m³ (given in product data sheet).

Ventilation air quantity m³ per minute to reach 10% LEL is:

(100 x 60) + (5 x 130) = 147.7 m³ per minute. 45 Remarks

This quantity of ventilation air must be maintained throughout the application of the paint and also during the period of evaporation of solvent. The ventilation must be arranged so that all parts of the compartment are properly ventilated. It is necessary for the applicator or the contractor to check vapour concentrations (in varying positions) regularly with an explosion meter. If the concentration rises above 10% LEL, painting must stop until the vapour concentration is reduced to a safe level again. Flash point

If possible paints with flash points above the ambient temperature should be used. This often is not possible, particularly in compartments heated up by strong sunlight in summer. In such cases it is even more essential that ventilation below 10% LEL is maintained. Sources of ignition

Sparks, hot surfaces, flames and all other sources of ignition must be absolutely prevented. Flame proof lighting and electrical equipment must be used, spark proof tools and clothing should be used and all work must be prohibited in adjacent compartments. All equipment, whether electrical or not electrical (e.g. pneumatic pumps, spray tips, etc.) must be adequately earthed to ensure no accumulation of static electrical charge.

TOXIC HAZARD

/5


INFORMATION

October 1999 General aspects of toxic hazard

Many solvents used in paint have some degree of toxicity and it is necessary to provide sufficient ventilation air to maintain safe atmosphere below the threshold limit value (TLV). With many common solvents this may be impractical when applying large volumes of paint in a short time. In such cases ventilation to give a clear visibility and safety from explosion will still be necessary. It will also be necessary to provide operators in the compartment with fresh air masks or hoods. Barrier creams and protective clothing may also be necessary. Full details are given below and data for calculation of RAQ (required air quantity) are also provided.

It is necessary to keep certain rules when using any paint since all can be harmful (even ordinary emulsion paints are dangerous if swallowed!). The following are basic safety precautions: Inhalation of dust and fumes

This must be avoided by the use of ventilation or extraction.

– products should be used in well ventilated areas – forced ventilation or fresh air masks should be used in confined spaces – a face mask should be worn when spraying, sanding or blast cleaning Skin contact

Some substances used in paint may cause irritation after repeated or prolonged contact with the skin and in susceptible cases there is a risk of dermatitis.

– operatives with a history of skin sensitivity should not be employed in processes where skin contact can occur – prolonged or repeated contact of paint with the skin should be avoided – barrier cream should be supplied and used – gloves should be worn – do not wash hands with solvent – use a proprietary hand cleanser Ingestion

The ingestion (swallowing) of paint must always be avoided.

– food should not be brought into or consumed in the work area where coatings are stored or used – thorough washing of hands and face is essential after applying paint, particularly before eating or smoking – if paint or thinners should accidently be swallowed, seek medical attention immediately

/5


INFORMATION

October 1999 Eye protection

Steps should be taken to prevent material entering the eyes.

– goggles should be worn whenever necessary – if the eyes become contaminated they should be irrigated with water; seek medical attention immediately Theoretical ventilation requirements

In the product data sheets, data are given for the minimum required ventilation air quantity (RAQ) in cubic metres when 1 litre of paint is applied or when 1 litre of thinner is used. The TLV (=threshold limit value) for the mixture of components and solvents in the paint or for the mixture of solvents used in thinners has been calculated. Calculation

The quantity of ventilation air required in m³ per minute during application and drying can be calculated from the formula: (P x M) + (Q x N) t

P = quantity of paint consumed in litres. Q = quantity of thinner consumed in litres. M = min. ventilation air quantity needed to reach TLV of 1 litre of paint. N = min. ventilation air quantity needed to reach TLV of 1 litre of thinner. t = application time in minutes. Example

100 litres of paint (P) are consumed in 45 minutes (t). 5 Litres of thinner (Q) were added to thin down the paint to the prescribed application viscosity. Value M is e.g. 780 m³ (see product data sheet). Value N is e.g. 2170 m³ (see product data sheet). The ventilation air quantity required during application and drying to reach TLV is:

(100 x 780) + (5 x 2170) = 1974 m³ per minute 45 Remarks

In semi-confined areas such as rooms with open doors and windows or the super structure of a ship, natural ventilation will be about 2 to 5 times the content of the room or space per hour, depending on weather conditions. The amount of fresh air necessary to reach TLV will be approximately 10 to 20 times the amount of fresh air necessary to reach 10% of LEL. When it is impractical to ventilate in such a way that TLV is not reached then fresh air masks must be used.

/5


INFORMATION

October 1999 Emergency procedure

It may be necessary to enter an atmosphere which is unsafe. (You may have to rescue somebody). Before entering a confined space or tank ensure that: – you wear breathing apparatus – you wear a lifeline – the lifeline is properly tended – a watch is kept on you – a means of communication exists – a system of signals is agreed – you and everybody else involved understand the signals You must also make sure that: – a back-up or rescue squad is equipped to render assistance – resuscitation equipment is on hand If you have to keep watch or tend a lifeline: – keep a careful watch on your men below If you cannot see them: – call out to them from time to time – make sure they answer If they do not answer repeated calls or if they show signs of drunkenness or unusual behaviour: – RAISE THE ALARM IMMEDIATELY – DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RESCUE THE VICTIM BY YOURSELF – DO NOT BECOME A VICTIM




/2

1433 SAFE WORKING IN CONFINED SPACES

INFORMATION


Safe working is always of the greatest importance, but particularly during application of tankcoatings. The illustrations on this sheet indicate the quite simple principal measures that will ensure safe working.

/2

1433 SAFE WORKING IN CONFINED SPACES

INFORMATION

October 1999




/2

1434 DIRECTIVES FOR VENTILATION PRACTICE

INFORMATION


Ventilation is required for reasons of health and safety. In addition for solvent containing coatings the quality of a coating system is greatly affected by the amount and type of residual solvent in the layer when the coating dries or cures. Adhesion, water resistance, mechanical and chemical properties can all be adversely affected when solvents remain trapped in the paint film. Very slow evaporation of trapped solvents can also develop internal stresses due to shrinkage.

The ventilation must be maintained throughout the application process at a minimum level of 10% of LEL value and for a period after application is completed when the paint cures or dries. As a guide line for good ventilation after application the confined space should be ventilated 4 to 5 times its contents per hour. Product data sheets indicate when any special ventilation requirements are required. Hot ventilation: Ventilating air with too high temperature can cause surface curing of epoxy coatings and although it may be necessary to produce a dry substrate before painting, the steel and air temperature should be such that when the application starts, the temperature of the ventilation (dehumidifier/heater) should be dropped so that the conditions stay stable. Hot ventilation air should be replaced by cool dry ventilation air as soon as possible after application of any coat is completed.

Good ventilation consists of at least extraction at the lowest areas, but in most cases when controlled conditions are needed, also of air input (dry and/or heated). The combination of in and output must be correctly balanced. The opening of the extraction hose should be close to the bottom of the tank (approx 30-60 cm). Ventilation air should be directed to the bottom of the tank or compartment and should be extracted by exhaust fans of correctly balanced capacity.

For complex structures the ventilation should be distributed over all compartments and confined spaces in order to facilitate good ventilation in all areas.

BALLAST TANKS AND OTHER CONFINED SPACES.

Due to regulations of the shipbuilding industry ballast tanks and double skin tanks count for many square meters confined spaces. Therefore it is necessary to pay good attention to the ventilation conditions during application, drying and curing of the coating on these areas.

Depending on the structure of the ballast tanks, forced ventilation or natural ventilation is used during coating of the new building blocks. However, natural ventilation in many cases is not sufficient due to half open box conditions and can cause serious drawbacks related to health and safety as well as curing and performance of the coating.

When ventilation is not sufficient solvents will not be removed, but will drift to the lower part of the section. As normally first the upperparts of a section will be painted, the solvents evaporating from the applied coating will drift to the lower part where it will attack the earlier applied coating (not yet fully cured) and this coating will absorb part of the solvents and swell. This coating will then be overcoated and problems related to bad adhesion, curing, water resistance etc. will result.

In case of waterborne paints, this advice is not valid. Water vapour rises to the upper areas of the tank and may give condensation. Therefore it is recommended to position an extra exhaust outlet at the top of the tank.

/2

1434 DIRECTIVES FOR VENTILATION PRACTICE

INFORMATION

October 1999 Also in this case ventilation is of utmost importance as drying under insufficient ventilation will prevent paint film formation.

Practices recommended




/8

1490 CLEANING OF STEEL AND REMOVAL OF RUST

INFORMATION

an eight page issue June 2007 revision of January 2007

DERUSTING METHODS The effective life time of a coating applied onto a steel surface is dependent

to a very large extent on how thoroughly the surface has been prepared prior to painting.

Surface preparation consists of primary surface preparation which aims to remove mill scale, rust and foreign matter from a steel surface prior to the application of a shop primer (prefabrication primer) or primer. Secondary surface preparation aims to remove rust and foreign matter, if any, from a steel surface coated with a shop primer (prefabrication primer) or primer prior to application of the anticorrosive paint system. A steel surface can be derusted in the following ways.

Wire brushing Wire brushing, usually done with rotating wire brushes, is a conventional

method, not suitable for the removal of mill scale, but suitable for the preparation of weld seams. The main disadvantage is, that treated surfaces are often not completely free of corrosion products and tend to become polished and contaminated with oil. This decreases the adhesion of priming paints and the performance of a paint system.

Chipping Chipping or mechanical chipping is usually done in combination with wire-

brushing. It is sometimes suitable for local repairs with conventional or special formulated paint systems. It is not suitable for general preparation of surfaces to be coated with epoxy or chlorinated rubber paints. It can be used for the removal of thick rust scale and economises in later blasting operations.

Needle hammer To remove rust, paint etc. from corners and angles in order to achieve a

cleaned surface with a profile. Flame cleaning Flame cleaning involves derusting by thermal treatment making use of

burning equipment (acetylene or propane and oxygen). It removes almost all mill scale, but rust to a lesser extent. Therefore this method cannot meet the requirements of modern paint systems.

Disc sanding Disc sanding involves use of rotating discs covered with abrasive material.

It is used for local repairs. The quality of these discs has been very much improved, and these can give good standards of preparation.

/8


INFORMATION

June 2007 Sweep blasting A hand operated form of superficial blast cleaning in which a primed or

coated steel surface is roughened and is free of almost all visible contamination. (except oil contamination or traces of rust) A: light sweep, purpose: roughening of intact coating and improving the adhesion of subsequent coats Abrasive: fine (0,2-0,5 mm) is most suitable when the paint surface under treatment is not to be destroyed B: heavy sweep (approx ISO-Sa1), purpose: removing of not sound coating areas - layers Abrasive: small to medium (0,2-0,5/0,2-1,5 mm)

Reference: Repainting of old metallic structures, limited blast cleaning scale Technical Guide, November 1993 Laboratoire Central des Ponts et Chaussées 58, bd Lefebvre, F 75732 Paris Cedex 15

Dry blast cleaning The impingement of a high kinetic energy stream of abrasive onto the

surface to be prepared. It is either hand operated by jet or automatically by impeller and is the most thorough method of derusting. Centrifugal blast cleaning, compressed air blast cleaning and vacuum blast cleaning are well known types.

Shot The particles are as far as practical spherical and solid and should not

contain more than the minimum practical amount of ‘tails’ and irregular shapes. Primers to be used for shot blasted steel should be checked on performance.

Grit The particles show good angularity form with sharp cutting edges and

should be substantially free from ‘half-rounds’ (i.e. shot split in half). Unless otherwise stated in the specifications a mineral grit should be used.

/8


INFORMATION

June 2007 Water (abrasive) Different types of water (abrasive) cleaning/jetting are in use cleaning/jetting Below you will find the most commonly used ones (Terminology NACE) For more info see also information sheet 1498 (Hydrojetting) Water (abrasive) Some examples of these techniques are given below, not pretending to be blast cleaning complete. New developments with wet blasting methods are presented regularly, improving the efficiency and reducing the amount of water or grit.

– LOW PRESSURE WATER ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING Pressure = 6-8 bar Water consumption = 90-300 l/hour Cleaning speed = 10-16 m²/hour, depending on material to be removed

Result: a surface cleanliness and blasting profile as required can be obtained.

– LOW PRESSURE HUMIDIFIED ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING

Pressure = 6-8 bar Water consumption = 5-60 l/hour Cleaning speed = 10-16 m²/hour, depending on material to be removed

Result: a surface cleanliness and blasting profile as required can be obtained.

– ULTRA HIGH PRESSURE WATER JETTING (UHPWJ)

Pressure - more than 1700 bar Use: Complete removal of all coatings and rust.

The result can be compared with dry abrasive blast cleaning, but with flash rust after drying. The original blasting profile will be maintained.

– HIGH PRESSURE WATER JETTING (HPWJ)

Pressure - from 700 to 1700 bar Use: Most paints and corrosion products will be removed, Magnetite and

hard tightly adherent coating may be left but can be removed with difficulty. The original blasting profile will be maintained.

/8


INFORMATION

June 2007 Water cleaning – LOW PRESSURE WATER CLEANING (LPWC)

Pressure - lower than 350 bar Use: Removal of salt, dirt and poorly adherent surface contamination.

Mainly washing of surface

– HIGH PRESSURE WATER CLEANING (HPWC) Pressure - from 350 to 700 bar Use: Loose paint, rust, debris and material in pits will be removed, but

black iron oxide (Magnetite) will remain. A uniform matte finish cannot be achieved.

– STEAM CLEANING

Pressure = 100-120 bar Use: Removal of water soluble or water emulsified contamination; the

substrate dries quicker compared to a water rinsed substrate. ISO STANDARDS When specifying a precise degree of derusting and cleaning of a steel

surface prior to painting, Sigma uses the ISO standard ISO 8501-1-1988 and ISO 8504-1992.

ISO 8501-1 This indicates the following rust grades:

Applicable to bare A = steel surface largely covered with adherent mill mill-scaled or rusty steel scale but little, if any, rust.

B = steel surface which has begun to rust and from which the mill scale has begun to flake. C = steel surface on which the mill scale has rusted away or from which it can be scraped, but with slight pitting visible when viewed normally. D = steel surface on which the mill scale has rusted away and on which general pitting is visible when viewed normally.

/8


INFORMATION

June 2007 DEGREES OF PRIMARY The ISO standard indicates six preparation degrees. SURFACE PREPARATION The following standards are often used in specifications:

ISO-St Surface preparation by hand and power tool cleaning, such as scraping, Hand and power tool wire-brushing, machine-brushing and grinding, is designated by the letters cleaning ‘St’.

Prior to hand and power tool cleaning, any heavy layers of rust shall be removed by chipping. Visible oil, grease and dirt shall also be removed.

After hand and power tool cleaning, the surface shall be cleaned from loose dust and debris.

ISO-St2 When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible Thorough hand and oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint coatings power tool cleaning and foreign matter. ISO-St3 As for St2, but the surface shall be treated much more thoroughly to give a Very thorough hand metallicsheen arising from the metallic substrate. and power tool cleaning ISO-Sa Surface preparation by blast cleaning is designated by the letters ‘Sa’. Blast cleaning

Prior to blast cleaning, any heavy layers of rust shall be removed by chipping. Visible oil, grease and dirt shall also be removed. After blast cleaning, the surface shall be cleaned from loose dust and debris.

ISO-Sa1 When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible Light blast cleaning oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. ISO-Sa2 When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible Thorough blast cleaning oil, grease and dirt and from most of the mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. Any residual contamination shall be firmly adhering. ISO-Sa2½ When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible Very thorough blast oil, grease and dirt and from mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign cleaning matter. Any remaining traces of contamination shall show only as slight stains in the form of spots or stripes. ISO-Sa3 When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible blast cleaning to oil, grease and dirt and shall be free from mill scale, rust, paint coatings visually clean steel and foreign matter. It shall have a uniform metallic colour.

/8


INFORMATION

June 2007 Remark The photographs in the ISO Standard publication are given as illustration

only. They do not represent the complete preparation degree, which also includes a cleaning operation which is not visible in the photographs. (colourless contamination).

Equivalents As far as blast cleaning is concerned, equivalents according to British and

American standards are given in the following table.

ISO 8501-01 BS 4232 SSPC-Vis 1 * Sa3 1st quality White metal SP 5 Sa2½ 2nd quality Near white SP 10 Sa2 3rd quality Commercial SP 6

* for more details see SSPC-SP com

Roughness of To specify the roughness, a variety of values is used. blast cleaned steel Such as Rz, Rt and Ra.

Rz = average peak to valley height = blasting profile Rt = maximum peak to valley height Ra = average distance to an imaginary centre line which can be drawn between peaks and valleys = C.L.A. = Centre Line Average (ISO 3274)

Normally Sigma Coatings uses Rz values.

Blasting Profile (Rz) = 4 to 6 times C.L.A. (Ra).

The direct measuring of the dft of primers applied onto blast cleaned steel in a thickness up to 30 µm is very inaccurate. A primer dft of 30 µm and more gives an average thickness and not the thickness present on the peaks.

When in the specifications blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2½ is mentioned a blasting profile Rz of 35-50 µm should be obtained using mineral grit unless otherwise mentioned.

Above a Ra roughness of 17 µm (= blasting profile Rz of 100 µm) it is recommended to use an additional coat of primer to cover the roughness.

A roughness profile above 100 µm often results if heavily rusted steel is blast cleaned.

JAPANESE STANDARDS These establish a systematic standard for secondary surface preparation Standard for the preparation prior to protective painting when shop primers (prefabrication primers) are of steel surface prior to used in the construction process of hull or steel structures. painting SPSS-1984

/8


INFORMATION

June 2007 Surface condition H = shop primed steel surface in way of hand welding

A = shop primed steel in way of automatic welding F = shop primed steel surface in way of gas-burning D = shop primed steel surface having white zinc salt R = shop primed steel surface having rust in the form of spots

GRADES OF SECONDARY SURFACE PREPARATION The Japanese Standard indicates six preparation degrees. The following standards are often used in specifications. SPSS-Pt2 Surface prepared by wire brushing for the surface condition A, D and R,

by wire brushing and disc sander for the surface condition H, by disc sander for the surface condition F. Almost all rust and foreign matter are fairly removed.

If mentioned for other surface conditions (e.g. primed or coated steel), almost all rust and foreign matter, have to be removed by wire brushing and/or disc sander.

SPSS-Pt3 Surface prepared by wire brushing and (in combination with!)

disc sander for the surface condition H and A and by disc sander for the surface condition F, R and D. Rust and foreign matter are removed to the extent that the surface has a uniform metallic sheen.

If mentioned for other surfaces conditions (e.g. primed or coated steel) all rust and foreign matter has to be removed to the extent that the surface has a uniform metallic sheen. Also used for the preparation of primed or coated substrate to remove rust from small areas such as scratches, pinpoints or areas of mechanical damage.

SPSS-Ss Surface prepared by light blast cleaning of slug sands or grits.

(Shop primer (prefabrication primer) with the little trace of rust is noticeable.) Also used for the preparation of a primed or coated substrates or galvanized steel to roughen the surface and to remove contamination or traces of rust.

Remarks In the Japanese Standard the expressions Sd2 and Sd3 are used, which are

equivalent to the Swedish expressions Sa2 and Sa3. ISO 8501-3 Preparation grades of welds, cut edges and other area with surface Grade P2 imperfections.

See illustrations in the standard

/8


INFORMATION

June 2007 Degree of cleanliness The ISO and the Japanese Standards give a visual impression of the quality

of the derusted steel. However, chemical contamination like water soluble salts etc. are not visible and remains partly on the surface. Presence of excessive amounts of water soluble salts can cause blistering of the coating by osmosis. Water soluble salts in mineral abrasives. For tankcoatings the maximum value of water soluble salts in mineral abrasives is 250 µS/cm (conductivity) (ISO 11127-6 1993). See further sheet 1491

Water soluble salts on the steel surface (ISO 8502-9 1998). Our maximum acceptable levels of water soluble salts, calculated as sodium chloride, on treated substrate prior to coating application depends on the area and expected service conditions.

equivalent sodium chloride conductivity (V=15 ml)

Cargo tanks 60 mg/m² (10.0 µS/cm) Immersed areas 80 mg/m² (13.3 µS/cm) Dry cargo holds 100 mg/m² (16.7 µS/cm)

Note Determination of water soluble salts: see information sheet 1468

For water ballast tank areas to be treated in accordance with IMO resolution MSC 215(82): water soluble salts limit equivalent to sodium chloride after blasting/grinding must be equal to or lower than 50 mg/m² of sodium chloride.

For areas exposed to atmosphere conditions We recommend the limit per dry cargo holds as noted in the table. Prior to treatment the substrate should be High Pressure Washed with Fresh (clean) water. As a guidance we recommend that the conductivity of abrasives prior to treatment should not be higher than 250 µS/cm.

REFERENCES Determination of water soluble salts according to the Bresle method (ISO 8502-6 1995) see information sheet 1468 Specification for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1491 Hydrojetting see information sheet 1498




/2

1491 SPECIFICATION FOR MINERAL ABRASIVES (ISO 11126)

INFORMATION

a two page issue June 2007 revision of October1999

SCOPE

This specification covers mineral abrasives such as corundum, aluminium silicate slag, or any slag mixtures which are suitable for removing rust, scale, old paint or shop primer from steel by blast cleaning and giving a satisfactory anchor pattern. This specification covers only those abrasives commonly known as utility grades. REQUIREMENTS

Material – The abrasive may be any material meeting the requirements of this specification. It shall be composed of clean, sound, hard particles free from foreign substances such as dirt, oil, grease, toxic substances, organic matter and water soluble salts. The abrasive supplier shall certify that any product to be delivered conforms to all requirements stated herein.

pH – 100 gram of a representative abrasive sample is crushed using a mortar and pestle. Approximately 50 grams of the crushed sample is added to 200 ml de-ionized water. The pH of this slurry is then determined through the use of an electronic pH meter with an accuracy of ± 0.01 pH unit. A slurry mixture prepared in this way shall not have a pH below 6.20. Water Soluble Salts (ISO 11127-6 1993) – The abrasive is mixed with de-ionized water, conductivity max. 1 µS/cm, in the proportion 1:1, e.g. 100 g abrasive to 100 cm³ water. The mixture is shaken for 5 minutes, allowed to settle for at least 1 hour and then shaken again for 5 minutes. Some of the water is decanted, the temperature is recorded and the conductivity measured by a conductivity gauge. If the conductivity gauge does not have any temperature compensation adjustment, the conductivity should be converted to 20°C or measurement should be carried out at this temperature. If the conductivity exceeds 250 µS/cm the abrasive is rejected. If the abrasive is to be used for High Pressure Wet Abrasive Blastcleaning the total amount of water soluble matter should be below 0,5% by weight. Moisture Content – Approximately 200 grams of abrasive shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 g in a tared weighing dish and dried at 105 to 110°C for 3 hours or more until successive weighings after additional 1 hour heating periods show a weight change of not more than 0.1%. The percentage of moisture is calculated as follows:

percent moisture = original weight - final weight x 100 original weight of sample

The moisture content for material deliverd in bags or in bulk shall not exceed 0.5% by weight. Oil and Grease – The abrasive shall not be contaminated with oil and grease. 10 cm³ abrasive is shaken with 10 cm³ methylene chloride for about 5 minutes. 5 drops of the solvent are applied to a clean glass plate. After complete evaporation of the solvent the glass plate is exposed to ultraviolet light in total darkness. If there is blue fluorescence the abrasive is rejected.

/2

1491 SPECIFICATION FOR MINERAL ABRASIVES (ISO 11126)

INFORMATION

June 2007 Hardness – Examine the abrasive material under a low-power microscope (10 x) and, if grains of different colour or character are present, select a few grains of each. Separately place the grains thus differentiated between two glass microscope slides. While applying pressure, slowly move one slide over the other with a reciprocating motion for 10 seconds. Examine the glass surface and, if scratched, the material shall be considered as having a minimum hardness of 6 on Moh’s scale. If any grains that fail to scratch glass are present, in any appreciable quantity, the total batch is rejected. Grain Shape – The individual abrasive grains shall be angular in shape. Surface Profile – The abrasive material shall produce a prescribed blasting profile Rz value (varying between 30-100 µm)




/3

1492Surface preparation of steel pipes and fittingsShop application

INFORMATION

a three page issue May 1998 reprint of 8-88

SURFACE PREPARATION

Surface preparation of steel pipes must be carried out according to the Dutch standard NEN 6901 or the Swedish standard SIS 055900. The metal surface must be freed from mill scale, corrosion and all contaminations such as oil, grease, dirt, soluble salts, markings and old coatings. Weldspatters and laminations must also be removed. The coating must be applied as soon as possible after completion of the surface preparation. CHEMICAL PRETREATMENT

The substrate must be precleaned to remove dirt, grease and oil. Pickling must be carried out on an industrial scale by one of the following methods. The first table describes a pickling process followed by a double water rinse. The second table describes a phosphating process consisting of pickling and rinsing followed by phosphating.

The requirements for the pickling and the phosphating process are drawn up to avoid excess thickness of phosphate layers and to ensure that no acids remain on the substrate. All pickling - rinsing or phosphating liquids must be renewed when the concentrations specified are reached (see tables). The content of the bath must also be renewed when the pretreated metal leaves the bath with contamination or if sediment interferes the action of the pickling process. Table 1Pickling Process

Pickling

Hydrochloric acid Sulphuric acid Acid concentration 55 - 220 g/l 50 - 295 g/l Temperature ambient 50 - 65°C Max. iron concentration 100 g/l 70 g/l Duration till complete removal of millscale and rust

First Rinsing

Min. water temperature ambient ambient Max. acid concentration 0,75 g/l 0,25 g/l Duration 5 min. 5 min.

Second Rinsing

Min. water temperature 70°C 70°C Max. acid concentration 0,20 g/l 0,10 g/l Duration 1 min. 1 min.

/3


INFORMATION

May 1998 Table 2Pickling/Phosphating Process

Pickling

Hydrochloric acid Sulphuric acid Phosphoric acid Acid concentration 55 - 220 g/l 50 - 295 g/l 105 - 225 g/l Temperature ambient 50 - 65°C 60 - 85°C Max. iron concentration 100 g/l 70 g/l 30 g/l Duration till complete removal of millscale and rust

Rinsing

Min. water temperature 60 - 65°C 65°C -- Max. acid concentration 0,75 g/l 1,00 g/l -- Duration 5 min. 5 min.

Phosphating

Temperature 80°C 80°C 80°C Duration 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. Max. iron content 5 g/l 5 g/l 5 g/l Normal phosphoric acid concentration 20 - 10 g/l 20 - 10 g/l 20 - 10 g/l

Phosphoric acid concentration for application of epoxy- and polyurethane coatings * 5 g/l 5 g/l 5 g/l

* The performance of epoxy- or polyurethane coatings on phosphated steel should always be checked in

advance. BLAST CLEANING

Before blast cleaning the surface should be thoroughly degreased by means of suitable detergents or emulsifiers.

Irregularities in the pipe surface should be removed by grinding or rotating discs. The surface should be dry before blasting.

Blasting must be carried out until to standard of cleanliness of SIS-Sa2½ of the Swedish norm SIS055900 (see sheet 1490). Usually a blasting profile (Rz) is recommended of approx. 50 micrometers which means a Ra or CLA value of 10-15 micrometers.

/3


INFORMATION

May 1998 Ventilation of sufficient capacity has to be used in order to maintain a workable and safe climate during blast cleaning. The pipes should rotate during the blasting operation at a sufficient speed to obtain a regular blasted surface.

Only suitable abrasives according to specification should be used (see sheet 1491).

Attention should be given to the weld seams which have to be blast cleaned in a way that the whole weld seam is pretreated.

Abrasives and dust should be removed completely from the blasted surface. ROTATING WIRE BRUSH CLEANING

Pipes to be used for the transport of Natural Gas, showing only minor rust and in good condition, may be pretreated by rotating wire brushes before they are coated with a flowcoat. Before wire brush cleaning the surface should be thoroughly degreased by means of suitable detergents or emulsifiers.

Irregularities in the pipe surface should be removed by grinding or rotating discs. The surface should be dry before blasting.

Cleaning must be carried out until to standard of cleanliness of SIS-St3 of the Swedish norm SIS055900 (see sheet 1490).

Ventilation of sufficient capacity has to be used in order to maintain a workable and safe climate during wire brush cleaning. The pipes should rotate during the cleaning operation at a sufficient speed to obtain a regular cleaned surface.

/1

1493INTERNAL CHEMICAL CLEANING OF STEEL PIPESIn-situ application

INFORMATION

May 1998 reprint of 8-1988

GENERAL ASPECTS

The "in situ" cleaning process for new and old, often corroded, pipe lines should be started with a thorough inspection of the pipe line. The internal diameter of the pipe line has to be checked and samples of rust and debris have to be collected to confirm that the cleaning operation will give the desired results. Because the total cleaning procedure will consist of a number of pig runs, a lot of information can be collected about the vertical head and elevation profile of the pipe line which knowledge is of great importance for the final coating operation. Besides that it is critical, it is very important that all pig trains containing water, chemical liquids and drying liquids are being launched solid, travel solid and are being received solid in order to clean the pipe line with success. Any condition that might impose a significant under pressure in any liquid train can cause air intrusion resulting in inadequate surface preparation and transfer of liquids to a position behind the train. The improvement in cleanliness should be continuously monitored by analysing the cleaning and pretreatment liquids, followed by, if available, inspection through a camera pig.

New in situ blast cleaning methods have been developed (sand jetting system) which may be very useful also to recoat previously coated pipe lines.

Removal of Dirt Dirt, sand, loose rust, loose mill scale, bolts, parts of welding rods, corrosion debris, loose scale and remainders of products previously transported to be removed by mechanical cleaning with wire brush pigs and scraper pigs followed by line washing with fresh water and solvents.

Degreasing Degreasing is extremely important as the presence of oil or grease will interfere with the subsequent acid cleaning. Detergent/water flushing requires a number of passes until analysis of the degreasing agents proves that all oil and grease is removed.

Chemical cleaning All mill scale and rust has to be removed completely also from corrosion pits by several passes of prescribed strength inhibited acid solutions until the internal surface is near to white metal. The spend chemicals used for cleaning have to be monitored by analysis, the degree of surface preparation has to be checked by usual inspection.

Passivating After the chemical cleaning all soluble salts have to be removed (often chlorides). To prevent flash rust formation a run with a prescribed concentration of inhibiting or passivating solution is to be carried out followed by rinsing the pipe line with fresh water until the water reach neutrality.

Drying All moisture in the pipe line has to be removed in order that a dry steel surface is available for coating by sending selected drying solvents through the pipe line followed by pigging with foam pigs together with dry air or nitrogen ventilation. In this way a clean and dry surface is achieved, together with a dehumidified atmosphere within the pipe line giving optimal conditions to coat the pipe line in situ.

/3

1496SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE(FLOORS)

INFORMATION

a three page issue February 2009 revision of September 2007

GENERAL ASPECTS

Once a coating or a polymer flooring has been selected it is essential that the surface preparation of concrete is done correctly, otherwise optimum performance will not be obtained. New concrete: In the case of newly made concrete it is important that the concrete has been laid for a minimum of 28 days before applying a coating or polymer flooring. The moisture content of the concrete should be below 4 % by weight. The release of the surplus water is dependant on the thickness of the concrete, the season, the temperature and relative humidity of the environment and the prevailing ventilation conditions. So the moisture content of the concrete should always be measured.

The moisture content at the concrete surface can be measured by an electronic instrument called Protimeter (Protimeter plc, U.K. telex 849305). An indication in the red area means that the concrete is still too wet. An indication in the green area means that the concrete can be coated. An indication in the yellow area means be careful. A concrete area of approx. 4 m² should be covered by a plastic sheet for 24 hours after which the measurement has to be repeated. If the indication becomes red then the subfloor is still too wet to apply a flooring.

A major problem with new concrete floors is the top surface layer known as laitance. This water rich top layer is formed during the binding period and is mechanically weak. In addition to the poor mechanical properties, the laitance has a chemical composition different from the rest of the concrete. Concrete floors with this laitance are obviously poor substrates to apply coatings to. It should therefore be a pre-condition that the laitance has been removed prior to the application of any floor coating or polymer flooring.

Old concrete: The removal of all oils, greases etc., together with the removal of the remains of any previously applied coating is required to ensure a sound base for the application of a coating, polymer flooring or screed. SURFACE PREPARATION

In order to ensure good adhesion and the long term performance of any floor coating or polymer flooring it is essential that the correct type of surface preparation is carried out. The removal of chemicals, oil, grease and fat must be completed before any other preparation work commences such as e.g. blasting or acid etching (ASTM D4259 or ASTM D4260). Mechanical tool cleaning must always be followed by removal of dust by means of vacuum cleaners.

Removal of chemicals from floor surfaces: Concrete that has become contaminated by chemicals must be neutralised before coating. If the contamination is acidic, it must be neutralised with an alkaline cleaner and rinsed thoroughly with fresh water. If the contamination is alkaline it can be cleaned with detergents and/or steam.

Oil and grease contamination can be removed by a combination of solvents, steam and/or detergents depending on the severity of the contamination.

/3


INFORMATION

February 2009 Abrasive blast cleaning: Abrasive blast cleaning should always be the best choice for the pretreatment of concrete if polymer flooring systems have to be applied. Blast cleaning is normally carried out using an enclosed system such as a Vacu-Blast, or Auto-Blast type machine. These systems are virtually dust free and work on the principal of propelling small particles of abrasive i.e. steel shot, against the floor surface whilst at the same time vacuum recovering the dust and abrasive to a recovery hopper. In addition to cleaning the floor and removing any laitance, blasting will leave the floor surface with a profile which will enable the coating to gain a physical as well as chemical adhesion to the substrate. Blast cleaning is the recommended system for large floor areas.

Scarifying: Scarifying (sometimes known as scabbling) involves the use of rotating wheels and brushes to scour the concrete surface. The scarifying equipment is pushed over the floor and the enclosed rotating wheels abrade the surface. It is not as efficient or as dust free as a Vacu-Blast machine and can in the wrong hands, cause excessive damage to the substrate. It is most effective on small areas or areas where abrasive blast cleaning cannot be carried out.

Power grinding: Similar to scarifying this method can be used to open up holes and voids and to remove loose materials from the surface of poured concrete and pre-cast slabs. Power grinding is slower than blasting but could be considered for small external floor areas. One should take care that the concrete surface is not polished by the power grinding.

Wire brushing: Wire brushing can be used to remove loose material from the surface and open up holes and voids in poured concrete. This can be either by power or hand wire brushing, power wire brushing giving increased productivity and effectiveness.

Impact tools: Concrete surfaces can be roughened using impact tools such as needle guns etc. However this method can be slow and should only be used for small repairs. Granulating or Hammering machines work quicker but should only be used if very hard concrete must be roughened or if flooring screeds have to be applied.

Impact tools are normally electrically or compressed air driven and work on a principal of a sharpened tool vibrating against the surface. It is fairly easy for an inexperienced operative to gouge the concrete surface and therefore great care should be taken when using this method of preparation.

Acid etching: This method of surface preparation is most suited for use on new concrete floors (not for sand/cement screeds). It is carried out to remove laitance but will not remove old paint or oil and grease and should only be used in areas where sufficient drainage exists to allow the removal of the water and acid solutions. To carry out acid etching the following procedure should be followed:

– Before commencing acid etching the concrete surface should be cleaned of all loose concrete. Deposits of oil and grease should be removed by steam cleaning or by using an alkaline cleaner or detergents.

– Thoroughly wet the floor with water

– Sprinkle an 8% to 10% solution of phosphoric acid in water uniformly over the floor. The approximate spreading rate is 1,5 m² to 1 litre of solution.

/3


INFORMATION

February 2009 – The acid solution should remain on the surface for 2 to 4 minutes and then be rinsed thoroughly with clean water. The rinsing can be done with a water hose and a sweeping broom.

– It is important that the rinsing is done immediately to prevent the formation of salts on the surface, which are difficult to remove.

– The concrete surface should be checked for acidity using pH paper and should have a pH of 7 or higher.

– Depending on the type of concrete, more than one operation may be required to achieve a satisfactory surface profile.

– A thorough rinsing with clean water should be carried out after each acid etch application. The surface profile after acid etching should be similar to fine sandpaper.

– The concrete should be allowed to dry prior to applying the coating.

Personnel involved in acid etching operations should be provided with safety goggles, protective clothing, rubber gloves and rubber boots. Rubber buckets should be used for mixing the solution. THE ACID SHOULD ALWAYS BE ADDED TO THE WATER rather than the water added to the acid.

Flame cleaning: Where conditions permit, deeply impregnated oils and greases can be removed from concrete floors by flame or superheated compressed air. This method involves the use of heat to bring the oil, grease etc. to the surface and should be carried out under strict supervision with the necessary precautions being taken in view of the possible hazards involved. After flame cleaning the surface should always be power tool cleaned.




/4

1650RELATIVE HUMIDITY - SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE - AIR TEMPERATURE

INFORMATION

a four page issue October 1999 revision of 1-1995

RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN (VENTILATION) AIR-TEMPERATURE, SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE AND RELATIVE HUMIDITY

To achieve optimum results in coating work it is essential to ensure that no condensation occurs on the substrate or in-between coats during the painting process. Air at a given temperature can only contain a certain (maximum) amount of water vapour. This amount is lower at lower temperatures. The maximum water content of air at different temperatures is given in the next table:

Degrees Centigrade Maximum water content g/m³

0 4,8 5 6,8 10 9,5 15 12,8 20 17,3 25 23,0 30 30,4 35 39,6 40 51,1 45 65,0

From these figures the relationship between dew point, air temperature and relative humidity can be calculated. This relationship is given in the next table: Relation between dew point, air temperature and relative humidity

Air Dew point in °C at a relative humidity of: Temperature °C 50% 55% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90%

5 –4.1 –2.9 –1.8 –0.9 0.0 0.9 1.8 2.7 3.6 6 –3.2 –2.1 –1.0 –0.1 0.9 1.8 2.8 3.7 4.5 7 –2.4 –1.3 –0.2 0.8 1.8 2.8 3.7 4.6 5.5 8 –1.6 –0.4 0.8 1.8 2.8 3.8 4.7 5.6 6.5 9 –0.8 0.4 1.7 2.7 3.8 4.7 5.7 6.6 7.5 10 0.1 1.3 2.6 3.7 4.7 5.7 6.7 7.6 8.4 11 1.0 2.3 3.5 4.6 5.6 6.7 7.6 8.6 9.4 12 1.9 3.2 4.5 5.6 6.6 7.7 8.6 9.6 10.4 13 2.8 4.2 5.4 6.6 7.6 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.4 14 3.7 5.1 6.4 7.5 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.5 12.4 15 4.7 6.1 7.3 8.5 9.5 10.6 11.5 12.5 13.4

/4

1650RELATIVE HUMIDITY - SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE -AIR TEMPERATURE

INFORMATION

October 1999

Air Dew point in °C at a relative humidity of: Temperature °C 50% 55% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90%

16 5.6 7.0 8.3 9.5 10.5 11.6 12.5 13.5 14.4 17 6.5 7.9 9.2 10.4 11.5 12.5 13.5 14.5 15.3 18 7.4 8.8 10.2 11.4 12.4 13.5 14.5 15.4 16.3 19 8.3 9.7 11.1 12.3 13.4 14.5 15.5 16.4 17.3 20 9.3 10.7 12.0 13.3 14.4 15.4 16.4 17.4 18.3 21 10.2 11.6 12.9 14.2 15.3 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.3 22 11.1 12.5 13.8 15.2 16.3 17.4 18.4 19.4 20.3 23 12.0 13.5 14.8 16.1 17.2 18.4 19.4 20.3 21.3 24 12.9 14.4 15.7 17.0 18.2 19.3 20.3 21.3 22.3 25 13.8 15.3 16.7 17.9 19.1 20.3 21.3 22.3 23.2 26 14.8 16.2 17.6 18.8 20.1 21.2 22.3 23.3 24.2 27 15.7 17.2 18.6 19.8 21.1 22.2 23.2 24.3 25.2 28 16.6 18.1 19.5 20.8 22.0 23.2 24.2 25.2 26.2 29 17.5 19.1 20.5 21.7 22.9 24.1 25.2 26.2 27.2 30 18.4 20.0 21.4 22.7 23.9 25.1 26.2 27.2 28.2

Using these figures curves can be drawn which give the relationship between air temperature, relative humidity and dew point. (See graph). To allow a sensible safety margin normally the substrate temperature must be at least 3 degrees centigrade above the dew point. The dew point is the temperature of a given air-water vapour mixture at which condensation starts, since at that temperature the maximum water content of the air is reached. Many important conclusions can be drawn from the graph, e.g.:

– at a relative humidity of 85% the lowest acceptable substrate temperature is approximately equal to the temperature of the (ventilation) air. For this reason outdoor paintwork must normally be carried out at a relative humidity below 85%.

– at a relative humidity of 90% the difference in temperature between substrate and dew point will be only 2°C, which means that the safety margin is narrowed. This can be overcome by raising the substrate temperature by approx. 1°C.

– at a relative humidity of 70% the relationship between the acceptable substrate temperature and the temperature of the (ventilation) air is given by the following table:

air temperature °C 5 10 20 30

dew point °C 0,0 4,7 14,4 23,9

lowest acceptable substrate temperature °C 3,0 7,7 17,4 26,9

/4


INFORMATION

October 1999 Although the substrate temperatures given in this table are well below the temperature of the surrounding

air no condensation will occur under the stated prevailing conditions.

– if the lowest acceptable substrate temperature is for example 5°C and the temperature of the atmosphere is also 5°C than the ventilation air can be heated and relative humidity will then be reduced according to the following table:

air temperature °C 5 10 20 30 40

relative humidity % 85 60 32 18 11

In general reduction in temperature leads to risk of condensation. For instance steel cooled down during the night will often show condensation and this will not evaporate until the steel is heated up again by sunlight or other means.




/4


INFORMATION

October 1999

No rights can be derived from the content of this publication. Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, all products and technical advice given are subject to our standard conditions of sale, available on our website www.ppgpmc.com. Bringing innovation to the surface, PSX, STEELGUARD are trademarks or registered trademark of PPG Industries Ohio, Inc. PITT-CHAR is a registered trademark of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. SIGMA COATINGS and SIGMA COATINGS and Design, NOVAGUARD, PHENGUARD, SIGMA AQUACOVER, SIGMA AQUAWELD, SIGMACOVER, SIGMADUR, SIGMAGUARD, SIGMAPRIME, SIGMARINE, SIGMASHIELD, SIGMATHERM, SIGMAWELD and SIGMAZINC are trademarks or registered trademarks of PPG Coatings Nederland B.V.

Website: www.sigmacoatings.com/protectiveEmail: [email protected]© 2012 PPG Industries, all rights reserved. 0105-GLOB

PPG Protective & Marine Coatings brings unrivaled levels of

innovation, experience and expertise in coatings technology,

supported through our expanding global supply and distributors’

network in over 80 countries.

We have in-depth knowledge of the industry, our customers’ day-to-day

challenges and the environmental, health and safety standards in

the marketplace. By working in close partnership with customers,

our technical service representatives are able to offer an unsurpassed

level of market knowledge. This enables us to respond quickly with

efficient, economic solutions in all environments and industries.

The result – performance-enhancing coating systems that can

be applied more easily, resist the elements more effectively,

and deliver maximum performance with minimum downtime.

PPG PROTECTIVE & MARINE COATINGS

Created January 2012

ppg - pc manual

Documents

zinc rich epoxy epoxy

zinc rich epoxy hs pu

steel protection industrial

sigma aquacover

steelguard fm

sigmaguard csf

aluminium lt

sigma aquaweld